Skip to main content

Full text of "Laboratory manual of general microbiology, with special reference to the microorganisms of the soil"

See other formats


LABORATORY  MANUAL 
OF  GENERAL  MICROBIOLOGY 


V 

LABORATOEY  MANUAL      f 

OF 

GENERAL  MICROBIOLOGY 

WITH  SPECIAL  REFERENCE  TO  THE 
MICROORGANISMS  OF  THE  SOIL 


BY 

EDWIN  BROUN  FRED,  Ph.D. 

Professor  of  Agricultural  Bacteriology,  University  of  Wisconsin 
AND 

SELMAN  A.  WAKSMAN,  Ph.D. 

Professor  of  Soil  Microbiology,  Rutgers  University 


C 


FiKST  Edition 
Second  Impression 


McGRAW-HILL  BOOK  COMPANY,  Inc. 
NEW  YORK:  370  SEVENTH  AVENUE 

LONDON:  6  &  8  BOUVERIE  ST.,  E.  C.  4 

1928 


Copyright,  1928,  by  the 
McGraw-Hill  Book  Company,   Inc. 


PRINTED    IN    THE    UNITED    STATES    OF    AMERICA 


THE  MAPLE   PRESS   COMPANY,  YORK,  PA. 


PREFACE 

This  laboratory  manual  has  been  designed  for  students  in 
General  Microbiology,  and  especially  for  those  working  with  soils 
or  with  organisms  isolated  from  the  soil.  Although  various 
exercises  are  described  primarily  for  students  in  soils,  the  methods 
of  isolation  and  cultivation  of  bacteria,  fungi,  actinomyces, 
algae  and  protozoa,  and  the  determination  of  the  biochemical 
activities  of  these  organisms  can  be  used  by  the  student  in 
General  and  Agricultural  Microbiology.  Special  attention  has 
been  paid  to  the  physiology  of  microorganisms,  including  the 
various  so-called  fermentation  processes,  in  an  attempt  to  bring 
out  not  only  the  qualitative  but  also  the  quantitative  relation- 
ships of  the  various  organisms. 

It  is  assumed  that  the  student  has  had  previous  training  in 
general  botany,  zoology,  bacteriology  and  chemistry;  a  knowledge 
of  organic  and  physical  chemistry,  of  mycology,  and  of  proto- 
zoology will  prove  of  great  assistance  in  carrying  out  the  experi- 
ments and  in  understanding  the  results. 

Out  of  the  numerous  media  suggested  for  the  cultivation  of 
non-pathogenic  organisms,  the  authors  selected  the  simplest, 
preferably  the  synthetic  inorganic  media,  and  those  that  have 
been  found  to  be  most  useful.  It  is  impossible  to  give  all  the 
chemical  methods  of  analysis  employed  in  microbiological 
investigations.  Only  a  few  of  the  most  essential  methods, 
dealing  largely  with  the  transformations  of  carbon  and  nitrogen, 
and  to  a  less  extent  of  phosphorus  and  sulphur,  have  been 
described. 

In  addition  to  references  given  in  the  text,  frequent  use 
has  been  made  of  the  various  nianuals  in  bacteriology,  a  list 
of  which  is  appended. 

The  authors  are  indebted  to  their  associates  for  many  helpful 
suggestions,  especially  to  Dr.  I.  L.  Baldwin,  Miss  Ehzabeth 
McCoy,  Dr.  J.  Blom,  and  Dr.  R.  L.  Starkey. 

Madison,  Wis.  ^dwin  Broun  Fred. 

New  Brunswick,  N.  J.  Selman  A.   Waksman. 

November,  1928. 


CONTENTS 

Page 

Preface v 

PART  I 

Culture  Media 

Principles  of  Microbial  Nutrition  and  Composition  of  Culture  Media 

for  Microorganisms 1 

General  Directions  for  the  Preparation  of  Culture  Media 3 

General  Media  for  Isolation  and  Cultivation  of  Bacteria 8 

Media  for  Anaerobic  Spore-forming  Bacteria 11 

Media  for  Fungi 12 

Media  for  Yeasts 16 

Media  for  Actinomyces 18 

Media  for  Protozoa 19 

Media  for  Algae 20 

Media  for  Urea  Bacteria 21 

Media  for  Nitrifying  Bacteria 22 

Media  for  Nitrate-reducing  and  Denitrifying  Bacteria 25 

Media  for  Reduction  of  Sulphates  and  Other  Sulphur  Compounds    .    .  26 

Media  for  Sulphur-oxidizing  Bacteria 28 

Media  for  Hydrogen  and  Methane  Bacteria 30 

Media  for  Iron  and  Manganese  Oxidizing  Bacteria •    .    .    .    .  31 

Media  for  Nitrogen- fixing  Bacteria 32 

Media  for  Cellulose-decomposing  Bacteria 35 

Special  Media 39 

Preserving  Stock  Cultures 45 

Favorable  Conditions  for  the  Development  of  Anaerobic  Bacteria.   .    .  46 

PART  II 

Methods  of  Staining 

Methods  of  Staining  Bacteria 47 

PART  III 

Qualitative  and  Quantitative  Methods  of  Analysis 

Preparation  of  Reagents 52 

Preparation  of  Standard  Solutions 54 

Qualitative    Methods   for    Determining   Various   Forms   of   Inorganic 

Nitrogen 56 

Determination  of  Moisture  in  Soil 61 


vn 


40291 


viii  CONTENTS 

Page 

Moisture-holding  Capacity  of  Soil 61 

Quantitative  Methods  for  Ammonia  Determination 62 

Quantitative  (Colorimetric)  Methods  for  Determining  Nitrates   ...  63 

Quantitative  Methods  for  Determining  Total  Nitrogen 65 

Determination  of  Amino  Nitrogen 69 

Quantitative  Determination  of  Carbohydrates 69 

Complete  Analysis  of  Natural  Organic  Material 76 

Humus  Determination 78 

Carbon  Dioxide  Evolution 79 

Determination  of  Total  Carbon 80 

Seed  Sterilization 82 

PART  IV 

The  Study  of  Microorganisms  in  TjHE  Soil 

A  Suggested  List  of  Arrangement  of  Class  Exercises 87 

Apparatus  for  One  Student 89 

Laboratory  Rules 89 

A  Black  Finish  for  Table  Tops .  91 

General  Characteristics  of  the  Soil  Population 92 

Microscopic  Examinations  of  Microorganisms 95 

Methods  for  Counting  Numbers  of  Microorganisms 97 

Nitrogen-fixing  Bacteria  (and  Nitrogen  Fixation  in  Soil) 106 

Denitrifying  Bacteria 121 

Nitrification 123 

Urea  and  Protein  Decomposition 126 

Sulphate-reducing  and  Sulphur-oxidizing  Bacteria 128 

Iron  Bacteria 132 

Cellulose-decomposing  Bacteria 133 

Evolution  of  Carbon  Dioxide  from  Soil 136 

Literature 137 

List  of  Laboratories  where  Cultures  Can  Be  Secured 139 

Index 141 


LABOEATORY  MANUAL 

OF 

MICROBIOLOGY 


PART  I 
CULTURE  MEDIA 

PRINCIPLES  OF  MICROBIAL  NUTRITION  AND  COMPOSITION  OF 
CULTURE  MEDIA  FOR  MICROORGANISMS 

Since  the  work  of  Pasteur  in  the  'fifties  and  'sixties  of  last 
century  on  pathogenic  and  non-pathogenic  microbes  and  since 
1881,  when  the  first  soUd  culture  medium  was  suggested  by  R. 
Koch  for  the  isolation  and  cultivation  of  bacteria,  numerous 
solid,  liquid,  and  semi-solid  media  have  been  recommended. 
The  composition  of  these  media  depends  entirely  upon  the  food 
requirements  of  the  specific  organism  that  is  to  be  isolated  or 
cultivated.  Since  microorganisms  vary  in  reference  to  the 
nature  of  the  nutrients  which  they  require  for  their  growth  and 
reproduction,  the  composition  of  the  media  which  are  to  be  used 
for  the  isolation  and  cultivation  of  different  organisms  will 
therefore  vary.  Some  media  are  adapted  to  the  growth  of  a 
maximum  number  of  different  organisms,  not  favoring  any 
particular  kind  in  preference  to  others.  These  are  the  media 
which  are  used  for  counting  the  numbers  of  microorganisms  in  the 
soil.  Other  media  are  highly  selective  in  nature,  allowing  the 
development  of  only  one  very  limited  group  of  organisms. 
These  selective  or  enrichment  media  are  used  largely  for  the 
isolation  of  certain  specific  organisms,  utilizing  their  specific 
physiology. 

In  general,  a  medium  must  contain  a  source  of  energy,  a  source 
of  carbon,  a  source  of  nitrogen,  and  various  mineral  elements 

1 


2  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

(P,  K,  S,  Ca,  Mg,  Fe,  etc.),  which  are  required  by  the  organisms 
for  the  synthesis  of  their  cell  substance.  Some  organisms  are 
very  specific  in  the  requirements  of  these  nutrients,  while  others 
can  derive  their  energy,  their  carbon,  their  nitrogen,  and  the  min- 
eral elements  from  a  great  variety  of  substances. 

Microorganisms  are  divided  broadly  into  two  large  groups,  on 
the  basis  of  their  energy  requirements:  (1)  The  autotrophic 
organisms,  which  can  obtain  the  energy  required  for  their 
activities  from  the  oxidation  of  inorganic  elements  or  their 
compounds  or  from  simple  compounds  of  carbon,  their  carbon 
from  carbon  dioxide,  and  their  nitrogen  and  other  minerals 
from  inorganic  compounds.  In  addition  to  those  organisms 
which  can  obtain  their  energy  from  the  oxidation  of  inorganic 
substances  or  simple  compounds  of  carbon  (chemosynthetic), 
the  chlorophyll-bearing  plants,  which  obtain  their  energy  photo- 
synthetically  are  also  classified  with  this  group.  (2)  The 
heterotrophic  organisms  which  obtain  their  energy  and  carbon 
from  complex  organic  substances. 

Among  the  heterotrophic  organisms,  however,  there  is  also 
very  considerable  specificity.  Some  organisms  can  obtain  their 
energy  and  carbon  only  from  celluloses,  while  the  great  majority 
of  microorganisms  cannot  attack  celluloses  and  cannot  utilize 
them  either  as  sources  of  energy  or  of  carbon.  Some  organisms 
can  obtain  their  nitrogen  from  inorganic  compounds,  such  as 
ammonium  salts  or  nitrates;  others  require  only  organic  nitrogen 
sources;  still  others  can  use  even  gaseous  atmospheric  nitrogen. 
Some  can  grow  at  a  wide  range  of  reactions;  for  the  activities  of 
others  only  a  very  limited  range  of  hydrogen-ion  concentration 
exists.  Some  organisms  are  able  to  grow  on  a  great  variety  of 
media,  liquid  or  solid;  others  will  develop  only  on  very  specific 
media,  when  the  particular  nutrients  are  available. 

In  addition  to  the  nature  of  the  nutrients,  it  is  also  important 
to  keep  in  mind  that  a  specific  osmotic  pressure  is  required;  in 
other  words,  the  concentration  of  the  nutrients  must  not  vary 
within  too  wide  limits.  Solid  media  are  often  required;  for  this 
purpose  either  inorganic  gels,  largely  silicic  acid  (also  mag- 
nesium-gypsum blocks),  or  organic  gels  of  a  carbohydrate 
nature  (agar-agar,  etc.)  or  of  a  protein  nature  (gelatin,  coagulated 
egg  albumen,  coagulated  blood  serum)  are  employed. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  3 

These  considerations  can  help  one  to  reaUze  why  such  a  great 
variety  of  culture  media  have  been  proposed  at  various  times  and 
are  used  in  microbiological  studies.  These  media  are  frequently 
modified  as  regards  the  concentration  of  certain  of  the  nutrients, 
reaction,  buffer  content,  elimination  of  one  nutrient  and  sub- 
stitution of  another. 


GENERAL    DIRECTIONS  FOR  THE   PREPARATION   OF   CULTURE 

MEDIA 

Of  the  numerous  formulae  of  various  culture  media,  which  have 
frequently  been  only  briefly  described,  only  the  most  essential 
and  those  which  have  been  tried  repeatedly  and  found  useful 
are  given  in  this  manual.  It  is  assumed  that  the  reader  has  at 
hand  a  manual  of  general  bacteriology,  such  as  the  Manual  of 
Methods  Prepared  by  the  Society  of  American  Bacteriologists; 
hence,  all  directions  for  the  preparation  of  standards,  for  measur- 
ing the  hydrogen-ion  concentration,  buffer  content,  etc.  are 
omitted.  The  formulae  are  arranged  according  to  the  general 
physiological  characters  of  the  microorganisms. 

For  general  purposes,  the  reaction  of  culture  media  for  bacteria 
should  be  about  the  neutral  point,  or  pH  7.0.  Some  will  grow 
at  a  considerably  lower  pH  value,  others  will  grow  only  at  the 
neutral  point  or  even  at  a  more  alkaline  reaction.  In  some 
cases,  bacteria  can  be  separated  from  one  another,  by  merely 
adjusting  the  reaction  to  such  a  point  as  to  eliminate  one  group 
of  organisms  without  injuring  the  other.  Fungi  are  able,  as  a 
rule,  to  grow  at  a  much  higher  acidity  than  bacteria.  This  fact 
is  utilized  frequently  for  the  separation  of  these  two  groups  of 
organisms:  by  adjusting  the  reaction  of  the  medium  to  pH  4.0, 
the  bacteria  are  practically  eliminated,  while  the  great  majority 
of  fungi  are  not  affected. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  adjust  the  reaction  of  a  medium,  the 
scheme  outlined  here  will  be  found  convenient.  Place  2  cubic 
centimeters  of  the  medium  and  8  cubic  centimeters  of  water  in 
a  test  tube  and  add  4  or  5  drops  of  phenol  red  or  any  other  of  the 
desired  indicators.  Now  add  0.1  iV  or  0.05  N  sodium  hydroxide 
from  a  burette  until  the  color  of  the  solution  matches  that  of  a 
known  standard.     Calculate  and  add  to  the  medium  the  amount 


4  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

of  normal  sodium  hydroxide  required  to  make  the  reaction 
pH  7.0.  Check  the  results  by  repeating  titrations.  All  attempts 
to  adjust  the  culture  to  an  exact  pH  are  unnecessary  since  the 
changes  in  reaction  due  to  heat,  glassware,  etc.,  will  be  found 
greater  than  a  pH  0.1. 

Filtration.  Funnel  Filter. — A  cotton  filter  is  prepared  as 
follows:  In  the  base  of  a  large  funnel  place  a  small  amount  of 
clean  excelsior.  In  place  of  the  excelsior  a  small  spiral  of  copper 
wire  or  iron-wire  netting  may  be  used.  On  top  of  this  put  two 
or  three  layers  of  absorbent  cotton.  Split  a  piece  of  absorbent 
cotton,  somewhat  larger  than  the  top  of  the  funnel,  horizontally 
into  two  layers  of  equal  thickness.  Place  one  layer  of  cotton 
above  the  other,  so  that  the  fibers  are  at  right  angles  and  wash  the 
cotton  filter  with  boiling  water.  Pour  the  medium,  slowly  at 
first,  on  to  the  filter.  (In  order  to  avoid  breaking  the  filter  use 
a  glass  rod  to  direct  the  fluid  to  the  center  of  the  filter).  When 
the  filtrate  begins  to  come  through  the  cotton,  fill  the  funnel. 
If  the  first  filtrate  is  not  clear,  the  turbid  liquid  should  be  refil- 
tered  through  the  same  cotton. 

If  several  liters  of  media  are  prepared  the  suction  method  given 
below  will  be  found  convenient. 

Suction  Filter. — Prepare  an  absorbent  cotton  filter  on  the  top 
of  a  heavy  walled  glass  bottle;  milk  bottles  are  satisfactory. 
Place  a  layer  of  cheesecloth  on  the  top  of  the  bottle,  then  one  or 
two  layers  of  absorbent  cotton  and  cover  with  another  layer  of 
cheesecloth.  Be  sure  that  the  filter  is  tied  tightly  around  the 
neck  of  the  bottle.  Now  invert  bottle  in  a  saucepan  containing 
the  medium.  It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  use  a  weight  to  hold 
down  the  empty  bottle.  Place  in  the  autoclave  and  heat  to  10 
or  15  pounds  pressure  for  20  minutes.  Allow  to  cool  slowly. 
The  heat  will  exhaust  the  bottles  and  as  it  cools  the  medium  is 
drawn  up  through  the  filter  pads.  Since  the  vacuum  in  the 
bottles  is  never  complete,  the  bottles  are  usually  found  to  be 
about  two-thirds  full  after  filtration. 

Solid  Media. — For  the  preparation  of  solid  media,  agar,  gelatin, 
or  silica  gel  are  commonly  employed.  Some  of  the  differences 
between  these  substances  are  shown  in  the  following  table: 


CULTURE  MEDIA 


General  Properties 


Agar 


Gelatin 


Silica  gel 


Source 

Chemical  nature 

Reaction 

Melting    point — usual  concentra- 
tion   

Solidifies,  usual  concentration . . . . 

Tryptic  digestion 

Water  of  condensation 

Usual  concentration 


Plant 

Carbohydrate 
Faintly  acid 

96°C. 
40°C. 

Not  affected 
Present 
1   to   IH   per 
cent 


Animal 
Protein 
Acid 

25°C. 
25°C. 

Liquefied 
None 
10    to    12 
per  cent 


Inorganic 
Silicic  acid 
Acid 


None 

5  to  6  per 
cent 


Agar-agar  is  prepared  by  extracting  certain  seaweeds  (largely 
Gelidium  corneum)  with  hot  water.  It  consists  almost  entirely  of 
polysaccharides  (largely  galactans  with  some  pentosan^)  and  a 
small  admixture  of  protein  and  mineral  matter. 

Approximate  Chemical  Composition  of  Agar  and  Gelatin 

Agar,  2  Gelatin, 

Per  Cent  Per  Cent 

Moisture 16.0  14  to  15 

Ash,  dry  basis 4.4  0.6 

Calcium  oxide 1.15  0.0 

Magnesium  oxide 0 .  77  •  0.0 

Nitrogen 0.40  18.3 

Pure  agar  has  practically  no  buffer  effect  within  the  range  com- 
monly employed. 

Washed  Agar. — This  is  prepared  as  follows:  Take  1,000  grams 
of  agar  shreds,  place  in  an  enamel  pail  or  glass  vessel  with  10  liters 
of  distilled  water  and  allow  to  stand  for  24  hours  at  room  tem- 
perature. Place  a  piece  of  cheesecloth  over  the  top  of  the  vessel, 
pour  off  the  water  and  once  more  add  fresh  distilled  water  and 
allow  to  soak  another  24  hours.  Now  pour  off  the  water,  and 
allow  the  agar  to  air  dry  in  thin  layers. 

Agar  treated  in  this  way  is  much  lower  in  calcium  and  mag- 
nesium, as  well  as  in  soluble  organic  matter.     In  the  preparation 

1  KoNiG  and  Bettels,  Ztschr.  Unters.  Nahr.  u.  Genussm.,  10:  487,  1905. 

2  Fellers,  C.  R.,  /.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.,  8:  1128,  1916. 


6  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

of  certain  kinds  of  culture  media,  it  has  been  found  that  the 
removal  of  these  inorganic  salts  prevents  the  formation  of  a 
precipitate  during  sterilization  and  hence  gives  a  clearer  medium. 

Preparation  of  Silica  Gel — Prepare  a  25  per  cent  solution  of 
equal  parts  of  sodium  and  potassium  silicate  (C.P.).  Adjust 
the  specific  gravity  of  the  solution  to  1.06.  Five  cubic  centi- 
meters of  this  solution  is  then  poured  into  a  Petri  dish,  and  a 
drop  of  phenolphthalein  added.  An  approximately  5  per  cent 
solution  of  HCl  is  added  to  this  silicate,  from  a  graduated  pipette, 
until  the  color  is  just  discharged.  The  acid  is  then  adjusted  so 
that  5  cubic  centimeters  of  HCl  solution  will  just  neutralize  5 
cubic  centimeters  of  the  sihcate.  If  care  is  taken  not  to  overrun 
the  acid,  the  gel  will  set  in  a  few  minutes. 

To  make  the  Petri  plates,  add  a  definite  volume  of  the  silicate, 
solution  to  an  equivalent  amount  of  acid,  placed  in  a  large  flask. 
Shake  the  mixture  vigorously  and  immediately  pour  20-  to  50- 
cubic  centimeter  portions  into  Petri  dishes.  Allow  the  plates 
to  harden  upon  a  flat  surface.  They  are  then  placed  in  deep  flat 
vessels  and  dialyzed  in  running  tap  water  until  free  from  chlorides. 
About  24  hours  is  required  for  this  purpose.  The  dishes  are  then 
removed  and  transferred  to  a  sterile  vessel  containing  boiled 
distilled  water.  This  is  replaced  several  times.  After  they  have 
been  properly  washed,  the  dishes  are  drained  and  treated  with 
the  nutrient  medium. 

Sterilization. — Unless  otherwise  stated,  it  is  recommended 
that  all  media  be  sterilized  in  the  autoclave.  In  the  case  of 
liquid  and  agar  media,  about  120°C.  for  20  minutes  will  be  found 
sufficient  for  complete  destruction  of  all  microorganisms.  In 
sterilization,  it  must  be  remembered  that  the  time  required  to 
kill  bacteria  depends  upon  the  degree  of  heat  at  the  center  of  the 
vessel  and  the  nature  of  the  medium.  This  degree  of  heat  is 
determined  by  the  size  of  the  container,  the  original  temperature 
and  viscosity  of  the  contents,  and  also  by  the  free  access  of  the 
steam  to  the  surface  of  the  container.  All  sterilizers  should  be 
equipped  with  temperature  controls  and  with  air  outlets  at  the 
bottom.  To  secure  the  best  results,  place  the  medium  .n  small 
containers  and  space  in  the  autoclave  in  such  a  way  as  to  give 
free  access  of  the  steam  to  the  surfaces.  The  time  of  steriliza- 
tion must  be  determined  for  the  various  types  of  media.     Agar 


CULTURE  MEDIA 


media  are  best  sterilized  at  15  pounds  pressure  for  15  to  30 
minutes.  Gelatin  media  are  sterilized  in  flowing  steam  on  three 
consecutive  days  or  in  the  autoclave  at  10  pounds  pressure  for 
30  minutes.  Soil  is  extremely  difficult  to  sterilize.  Small 
containers  with  about  5  to  10  grams  of  soil  are  heated  in  the 
autoclave  at  15  to  20  pounds  pressure  for  2  hours  one  day,  or  1 
hour  on  each  of  2  consecutive  days,  or  in  flowing  steam  on  at 
least  7  consecutive  days. 

The  relation  between  pressure  and  temperature  is  shown  in 
the  table  below: 


Pressure 

Temperature 

Pounds  per 
square  inch 

Atmosphere 

100°C 

0 

7.5 
15.0 
22.5 
30.0 

0 

112°C 

0.5 

121°C  

1.0 

128°C               

1.5 

135°C 

2.0 

The  reaction  of  a  medium  has  a  decided  influence  upon  the 
decompositions  brought  about  by  sterilization.  The  lower  the 
pH  of  the  medium,  the  greater  will  be  the  hydrolyzing  effect  of 
the  sterilization,  not  only  of  gelatin,  but  also  of  agar,  so  that  at 
pH  4.0,  as  much  as  3  per  cent  agar  has  to  be  used  to  obtain  a 
soUd  medium.  When  the  medium  is  alkaline,  the  iron  of  the 
solution  will  be  precipitated  out.  This  may  necessitate  the 
addition  of  a  small  amount  of  sterile  iron  salt,  or  the  sterilization 
of  the  medium  by  filtration  through  a  Berkefeld  filter. 

It  is  recommended  that  culture  media  be  inoculated  as 
soon  as  possible  after  sterilization.  Because  of  the  adsorbed 
air,  old  culture  medium  is  unfit  for  the  growth  of  strict  anaerobic 
bacteria. 

Silica  gel  media  need  not  be  sterilized.  The  washing  with 
sterik  \  vter,  followed  by  the  use  of  highly  selective  media  is 
sufficient  to  assure  sterility,  as  far  as  air  contaminations  are 
concerned.  Their  use  is  adapted  only  to  the  very  selective 
organisms. 


8  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

GENERAL  MEDIA  FOR  ISOLATION  AND   CULTIVATION  OF 

BACTERIA 

Medium  1 

Nutrient  Broth  or  Bouillon 

Beef  extract 3.0  gm. 

Peptone 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Heat  until  extract  and  peptone  are  dissolved. 

Adjust  reaction  to  pH  6.6  to  7.0  using  Brom  thymol  blue. 

Medium  2 

I 
Nutrient  or  Beef-extract  Agar 

The  same  composition  as  nutrient  broth  (Medium  1)  plus  15 
grams  of  agar. 

Medium  3 

Nutrient  or  Beef-extract  Gelatin 

Gelatin 100.0  to  150 . 0  gm. 

Beef  extract 3.0  gm. 

Peptone 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

In  a  convenient  vessel  measure  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of 
nutrient  broth. 

Add  10  to  15  per  cent  gelatin.  Let  the  gelatin  soak  5  to  10 
minutes. 

Heat  over  water  bath  until  dissolved. 

Adjust  the  reaction  as  directed  in  the  preparation  of  nutrient 
broth.  Gelatin  is  decidedly  acid  and  has  a  high  buffer  value; 
it  will,  therefore,  require  more  NaOH  for  neutralization  than 
bouillon  or  agar. 

If  properly  prepared,  gelatin  may  be  filtered  through  filter 
paper.  Otherwise  it  will  be  necessary  to  use  an  absorbent- 
cotton  filter. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  9 

Medium  4 
Sodium  Caseinate  or  Nutrose  Agar 

Agar 12.5  gm. 

Sodium  caseinate  (nutrose) 2.0  gm. 

Glucose 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Reaction  approximately  pH  6.8. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  adjust  the  reaction  of  this  medium.  To 
secure  a  clear  agar  filter  through  cotton. 

Medium  5 
Sodium  Albuminate  AgarI 

Agar 12.5    gm. 

Glucose 1.0    gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2    gm. 

Ferric  sulphate  (Fe2(S04)3'9H20) trace 

Egg  albumen  (powdered) 0 .  25  gm. 

Water,  distilled 1,000.0    cc. 

1  Waksman,  S.  a.,  Soil  Sci.,  14:  283-298,  1922. 

Make  a  suspension  of  the  egg  albumen  in  a  little  water  (5 
cubic  centimeters),  add  a  drop  of  phenolphthalein  and  enough 
0.1  iV  NaOH  to  dissolve  and  bring  solution  to  a  permanent 
pink  color ;  the  sodium  albuminate  is  then  added  to  the  remainder 
of  the  medium.     Reaction  is  about  pH  7.2. 

Medium  6 

Nahrstoff-Heyden  Agar2 

Agar 12.5  gm. 

Nahrstoff-Heyden 7.5  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2  Hesse,  W.,  and  Niedner,  Z.  Hijg.,  29:  454-462,  1898. 

To  500  cubic  centimeters  of  cold  distilled  water  in  a  flask  add 
7.5  grams  of  Nahrstoff-Heyden.  Shake  until  a  good  suspension 
is  obtained  and  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  for  30  minutes  or  more. 


10  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Heat  in  steamer  or  double  boiler  for  1  hour,  or  until  the  upper 
portion  of  the  solution  is  clear. 

While  hot  filter  through  paper. 

Dissolve  12.5  grams  of  agar  in  500  cubic  centimeters  of  water. 
Filter  and  mix  the  Nahrstoff-Heyden  and  agar  solutions. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  adjust  the  reaction  of  this  medium. 

Medium  7 
Soil-extract  Agar 

Agar 12.5  gm. 

Glucose 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Soil  extract  (stock)  ^ 100 . 0  cc. 

Tap  water 900.0  cc. 

1  Stock  Solution  of  Soil  Extract. — This  is  prepared  by  heating  1,000  grams 
of  garden  soil  with  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  tap  water  in  the  autoclave  for 
30  minutes.  A  small  amount  of  calcium  carbonate  is  added  and  the  whole 
is  filtered  through  a  double  paper  filter.  The  turbid  filtrate  should  be  poured 
back  on  to  the  filter  until  it  comes  through  clear. 

Dissolve  the  agar  in  900  cubic  centimeters  of  water  by  heating 
in  the  steamer  for  1  hour  or  longer.  Add  100  cubic  centimeters 
of  the  stock  soil-extract  solution. 

Add  the  glucose  just  prior  to  tubing. 

The  reaction  should  be  pH  6.8. 

Medium  8 

Soil- EXTRACT  Gelatin  2 

Gelatin 150.0  gm. 

Glucose 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Soil  extract  (stock) 100.0  cc. 

Tap  water 900.0  cc. 

2  Conn,  H.  J.,  N.  Y.  Agr.  Expt.  Sta.,  Tech.  Bull.  38,  1914. 

Dissolve  the  gelatin  in  the  diluted  soil-extract  solution  by 
heating  slowly  in  the  steamer. 

Clarify  the  medium  with  egg  albumen. 

Add  1  gram  of  glucose  and  adjust  the  reaction  to  pH  6.8. 

To  prevent  the  spread  of  liquefying  colonies  add  5  grams  of 
sodium  chloride  (NaCl)  per  liter. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  11 

Medium  9 

ASPARAGIN    MaNNITOL  AgAR^ 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaGl2) 0.1  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.1  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCl3-6H20) trace 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3) 0.5  gm. 

Mannitol 1.0  gra. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  Thornton,  H.  G.,  Ann.  Appl  Biol,  9:  241-274,  1922. 

After  the  agar  and  salts  have  been  dissolved  add  the  mannitol, 
adjust  the  reaction  to  pH  7.4  (Brom  thymol  blue)  and  filter. 
Mannitol  is  recommended  in  place  of  glucose  or  related  sugars 
because  it  decomposes  less  than  the  common  sugars  during 
sterilization. 

Medium  10 
Tap- WATER  Gelatin 2 

Gelatin 120  to  200.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2  Conn,  H.  J.,  N.  Y.  Agr.  Expt.  Sta.,  Tech.  Bull  57,  1917. 

Reaction  pH  6.5. 

Incubate  the  plates  at  18°C.  for  7  days.  This  medium  is 
especially  useful  in  qualitative  studies  of  soil  flora. 

MEDIA  FOR  ANAEROBIC  SPORE-FORMING  BACTERIA 

Medium  11 

Glucose-phosphate  Nitrogen  Free  Medium  for  Anaerobic  Bacteria^ 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2    gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.01  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H.20) 0.01  gm. 

Manganese  sulphate  (MnS04-4H20) 0.01  gm. 

Glucose 20.0    gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOa) 30 . 0    gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0    cc. 

3  Winogradsky,  S.,  Centr.  BakL,  II  Abt.,  9:  49,  1902. 


12  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

In  order  to  prevent  decomposition  of  the  glucose,  it  is  well  to 
sterilize  the  calcium  carbonate  separately.  Tube  in  deep  layers. 
For  a  solid  medium  add  15  grams  of  agar  to  each  liter. 

Medium  12 

Winogradsky's  Glucose-peptone  Agar 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Peptone 5.0  gm. 

Beef  extract 3.0  gm. 

Glucose 5.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Reaction,  pH  7.0.     Deep  tubes. 

Medium  13 
Peptone-mannitol  Solution  for  Anaerobic  Bacteria^ 

Peptone 2.5      gm. 

Beef  extract 2.0      gm. 

Mannitol  or  glucose 10.0      gm. 

Manganese  sulphate  (MnS04-4H20) 0.004  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0      cc. 

1  Truffaut,  G.  et  N.  Bezssonoff,  Compt.  rend.  Acad.  Sci.,  173:  868,  1921. 

Adjust  the  reaction  to  pH  7.0. 

MEDIA  FOR  FUNGI 

Medium  14 

Raulin's  Solution 

Ammonium  nitrate  (NH4NO3) 4.0    gm. 

Ammonium  phosphate  ((NH4)2HP04) 0.6    gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 0 .  25  gm. 

Potassium  carbonate  (K2CO3) 0.6    gm. 

Magnesium  carbonate  (MgCOs) 0.4    gm. 

Zinc  sulphate  (ZnS04) 0.07  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) 0 .  07  gm. 

Potassium  sihcate  (K2Si03) 0 .  07  gm. 

Tartaric  acid 4.0    gm. 

Sucrose 70 . 0    gm. 

Distilled  water 1,500.0    cc. 

This  medium  is  given  here  due  to  its  historical  significance. 
The  cultivation  of  fungi  can  be  carried  out  successfully  on  a  much 
simpler  medium. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  13 

Medium  15 
Ammonium  Nitrate-sucrose  Solution 

Ammonium  nitrate  (NH4NO3) 3.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Sucrose 50 . 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

Medium  16 

Sodium  Nitrate-sucrose  Solution  (Czapek's)^ 

Sodium  nitrate  (NaNOs) 2.0    gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 1 .00  gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 0 .  50  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0 .  50  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04  -71120 0.01  gm. 

Sucrose 30 .  00  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.00  cc. 

1  CzAPEK,  F.,  Beitrage  z.  chem.  Phijsiol.  u.  Path.,  I:  538-560,  1901. 

To  prepare  an  agar  medium,  add  15  grams  of  agar  to  1,000  cubic 
centimeters  of  solution.  Dissolve  and  filter.  The  reaction  is 
left  unadjusted. 

Medium  17 

Asparagin-glucose  Agari 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Glucose 10 . 0  gm. 

Asparagin 0.5  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

1  Krainsky,  a.,  Centr.  Bakt.  II  Abt.,  41:  649-688,  1914. 
This  medium  is  also  used  for  the  cultivation  of  actinomyces. 

Medium  18 
Peptone-glucose  Acid  Agar^ 

Agar 25.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Peptone 5.0  gm. 

Glucose 10.0  gm. 

Water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

1  Waksman,  S.  a.,  /.  BacL,  7:  339-341,  1922. 

Reaction  pH  3.8  to  4.0. 


14  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Dissolve  the  salts,  peptone  and  agar  by  steaming  for  H  to  1 
hour,  adjust  the  reaction  to  pH  3.8  to  4.0  with  N/1  H2SO4 
(about  5  to  7  cubic  centimeters  of  N/1  per  liter)  and  then  add 
the  glucose.  Filter  through  cotton,  using  a  suction  flask. 
Because  of  the  acid  reaction  steriUze  in  the  autoclave  at  110°C. 
(7  to  8  pounds  pressure)  not  more  than  10  minutes.  Avoid 
excessive  heat. 

The  medium  may  be  prepared  without  addition  of  acid, 
filtered,  then  placed  in  100-cubic  centimeter  portions,  in  Erlen- 
meyer  flasks  and  sterihzed.  Whenever  needed  for  use,  the  agar 
is  melted  by  placing  flasks  in  boiling  water.  One  cubic  centimeter 
of  N/2  H2SO4  is  then  added  to  each  flask  giving  the  desired 
reaction. 

Medium  19 

Potato-glucose  Agar 

Agar 30.0  gm. 

Potato 200.0  gm. 

Glucose 20.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Peel  and  shce  200  grams  of  potatoes.  Cook  in  1,000  cubic 
centimeters  water  for  1  hour  in  the  steamer.  Strain  or  decant 
the  clear  Hquid  and  restore  it  to  the  original  volume.  Add  20 
grams  glucose  and  30  grams  agar.  Heat  in  steamer  until  the 
agar  is  dissolved.     Filter  through  cotton  filter. 

Medium  20 

ASPARAGIN-STARCH    AgAR^ 

(Brown,  modified  for  color  formation) 

Agar 15.00  gm. 

Potato  starch 10.00  gm. 

Asparagin 0 .  20  gm. 

Potassium  phosphate,  ortho  (K3PO4) 1-25  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0 . 75  gm. 

Water 1,000.00  cc. 

1  Brown,  W.,  Ann.  BoL,  39:  405,  1925. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  15 

Medium  21 

Clover-sucrose  Agar 

Agar 25 . 0  gm. 

Clover  (green  tops) 500 . 0  gm. 

Sucrose 2.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 0.5  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Extract  the  clover  tissue  by  heating  for  1  hour  in  the  steamer; 
filter  and  add  the  other  ingredients.  Add  1  to  2  drops  of  concen- 
trated lactic  acid  to  each  tube  of  the  medium  just  before  pouring 
plates. 

Reaction  approximately  pH  3.5. 


Medium  22 
Peptone-malt  Agar^ 

Agar 20 . 0  gm. 

Peptone 1.0  gm. 

Glucose 20.0  gm. 

Malt  extract  (desiccated) 20 . 0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  PovAH,  A.  H.  W.,  Torrey  Bot.  Club.  Bull,  44:  241,  287,  1917. 
This  medium  is  used  for  the  cultivation  of  Mucorales. 


Medium  23 
Ammonium  Nitrate  Lactic  Acid  Solution^ 

Ammonium  nitrate  (NH4NO3) 10.0  gm. 

Dipotassium- phosphate  (K2HPO4) 5.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Lactic  acid  (85  per  cent) 2.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2v.  TuBEUF,  C,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  9:  127-135,  1902. 

Fifty-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  this  solution  are  added 
to  flasks  containing  10  grams  of  filter  paper.  This  medium  is 
used  for  the  cultivation  of  wood-destroying  fungi. 


16  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

MEDIA  FOR  YEASTS 
Medium  24 
Sucrose  Peptone  (Hansen's)  Solution 

Sucrose  or  maltose 50 . 0  gm. 

Peptone 10.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 3.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 2 . 0  to  5 . 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000. 0  cc. 

Medium  25 
Sucrose — Malt  Extract  Agar 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Sucrose 50 . 0  gm. 

Malt  extract  (desiccated) 10. 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Medium  26 
Malt  Extract  Broth 

Malt  (finely  ground) 250 . 0  gm. 

or 

Malt  extract  (desiccated) 15.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Incubate  for  1  hour  at  65°C.  and  test  for  starch;  when  the 
latter  is  still  present,  incubate  for  a  longer  time.  Filter  through 
a  hand  press,  cook  for  2  to  3  hours.  Again  filter  and  make  up 
to  1  liter.     For  a  soUd  medium  add  1.2  to  1.5  per  cent  of  agar. 

Medium  27 
Fresh  Yeast  Infusion 

Yeast  (fresh-pressed  cakes,  starch-free) 100.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

The  1-pound  cake  of  starch-free  pressed  yeast  will  be  found 
useful.  Steam  for  3  to  4  hours  with  occasional  stirring.  Steri- 
lize in  deep  layers  and  allow  to  stand  for  1  week.  If  undisturbed 
the  yeast  cells  will  settle  to  the  bottom  and  leave  a  clear  straw- 
colored  liquid  above.  This  clear  infusion  should  be  siphoned 
off  and  the  reaction  adjusted  to  pH  6.6  to  6.8.  Yeast  extract 
prepared  in  this  way  contains  only  a  trace  of  fermentable  carbo- 


CULTURE  MEDIA  17 

hydrates,  a  small  amount  of  non-volatile  acid,  and  about  50 
milligrams  of  nitrogen  in  100  cubic  centimeters.  For  fermenta- 
tion studies,  add  1  to  2  per  cent  of  the  required  carbohydrate. 
For  a  sohd  medium  add  15  grams  of  agar. 


Medium  28 

Dried  Yeast  Infusion 

Yeast  (dry,  starch-free) 10.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Proceed  as  described  under  medium  27. 


Medium  29 

Dried  Yeast-peptone  Infusion 

Dried  yeast 10. 0  gm. 

Peptone 10.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Medium  30 

Ammonium  Sulphate-glucose  Solution 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 5 .00  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0 .75  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0 .  10  gm. 

Tartaric  acid  (C4H6O6) 1 .00  gm. 

Glucose 100.00  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.00  cc. 

Medium  31 

Raisin  Extract 

Raisins 375.0  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 2.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Allow  the  raisins  to  stand  in  1  Uter  of  water  at  ice-box  tem- 
perature for  1  to  2  days.  Mash,  add  the  ammonium  chloride, 
cook  in  the  steamer  for  30  minutes,  and  filter. 


18  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Medium  32 
Synthetic  Solution  for  Yeast^ 

Sucrose 50.0    gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 6.0    gm. 

Mono-ammonium  phosphate  (NH4H2PO4) 2.0    gm. 

Potassium  sulphate  (K2SO4) 4.0    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 2 .  25  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaS04) 2 .  25  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  Hayduck,  F.,  U.  S.  Patent,  Reissue  15,  716. 

Medium  33 
Carrot  Extract  Agar  for  Spore  Formation  of  Yeasts 

Carrots 1,000.0  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaS04-2H20) 10.0  gm. 

Agar 20.0  gm. 

Water 200  to  300  cc. 

Wash  and  grind  the  carrots  in  a  meat  chopper.  Add  200  to 
300  cubic  centimeters  of  tap  water  and  boil  for  about  10  minutes. 
Filter  through  cheesecloth.  Add  the  calcium  sulphate  and  agar 
and  heat  in  steamer  for  30  minutes.  Tube  for  slopes  and  sterilize 
at  15  pounds  for  15  to  20  minutes. 

MEDIA  FOR  ACTINOMYCES^ 
Medium  34 

Nitrate-sucrose  Agar^ 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Sodium  nitrate  (NaNOs) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) 0.01  gm. 

Sucrose 30.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Reaction  approximately  pH  7.0. 

2  For  the  cultivation  of  acid-resisting  actinomyces,  the  reaction  of  these 
media  as  well  as  of  medium  17  should  be  adjusted  to  pH  4.0.  Jensen,  H. 
L.,  Soil  Sci.  25 :  225,  1928. 

3  Waksman,  S.  a.,  Soil  Sci.,  8:  71-215,  1919. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  19 

Medium  35 
Sodium  Asparaginate-glycerol  Agar^ 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Glycerol 10.0  cc. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  asparaginate 1.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  Conn,  H.  J.,  N.  Y.  Agr.  Expt.  Sta.,  Tech.  Bull  60,  1917. 

Reaction  approximately  pH  7.0. 

Medium  36 

Ammonium  Sulphate-starch  Agar^ 

Agar 10.0  gm. 

Starch  (soluble) 10 . 0  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride 1.0  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 3.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2  McBeth,  I.  G.,  and  F.  M.  Scales,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr.,  Bur.  PI.  Ind.  Bull. 
266,  1913. 

Mix  the  starch  with  a  little  cold  water  and  stir  well  before 
adding  the  salts. 

MEDIA  FOR  PROTOZOA 

Medium  37 

Nutrient  or  Beef  Extract  Agar^ 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Beef  extract 3.0  gm. 

Peptone 10.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

3  Sandon,  H.,  and  D.  W.  Cutler,  /.  Linn.  Soc.  Zool,  38 :  1,  1924. 

Adjust  the  reaction  to  pH  7.0. 

Medium  38 
Hay  Infusion 

Meadow  hay  (finely  chopped) 50 . 0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Boil  for  2  hours  and  allow  to  stand  over  night.     Filter. 


20  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Medium  39 

Ammonium  Lactate  Solution 

Ammonium  lactate 0.1  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH^Cl) 0.3  gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 0.3  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.001  gm. 

Disodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04) 0.01  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCU) 0.2  gm. 

Glucose 0.4  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

Medium  40 

Mannitol  Soil  Extract 

Soil  extract  (stock) 100 . 0  cc. 

Mannitol 10.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Tap  water 900 . 0  cc. 

Medium  41 
Mannitol-phosphate  Solution^ 

Mannitol  (C6H8(OH)6) 10.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0.2  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0 . 2  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaS04-2H20) 0.1  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  AsHBY,  S.  F.,  J.  Agr.  Sci.,  2:  38,  1907. 

Dissolve  the  phosphate  separately  in  a  little  water  and  make 
the  solution  neutral  to  phenolphthalein  with  A^/1  NaOH;  then 
add  to  the  other  ingredients.  For  a  solid  medium  add  15  grams 
of  agar  to  each  liter. 

MEDIA  FOR  ALG^ 

Medium  42 
Calcium  Nitrate  Solution  (Detmer's) 

Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(N03)2) 10    gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 0. 25  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0 .  25  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0 .  25  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0    cc. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  21 

Dilute  1  part  of  the  above  medium  with  2  parts  of  tap  water 
and  add  0.01  per  cent  of  ferric  chloride  (FeCl3'6H20). 

Medium  43 

Sodium  Nitrate  Solution  (Bristol's) ^ 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0.5    gm. 

Sodium  nitrate  (NaNOs) 0.5    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0 .  15  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCl.) 0.05  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.05  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCh-OH.O) 0 . 01  gm. 

Water 1,000.0    cc. 

1  Bristol,  B.  M.,  Ann.  Bot.,  34:  35-79,  1920. 

Because  of  the  special  sensitiveness  of  the  algae  to  copper, 
it  is  well  to  avoid  distilled  water  unless  from  glass. 

MEDIA  FOR  UREA  BACTERIA 

Medium  44 

Urea  Citrate  Solution^ 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 30.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Calcium  citrate  (Ca3(C6H507)2-4H20) .  .  .         10.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000 :0  gm. 

2S0HNGEN,  N.  G.,  Centr.  Bakt.  II  Abt.,  23:  91-98,  1909. 

Reaction  about  pH  7.2. 

Medium  45 

Urea  Solution  ^ 

Urea .^ 20.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1-0  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaClo) 0.1  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.3  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.1  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCla-OHaO) 0.01  gm. 

Beef  extract 5.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

3  Viehoever,  A.,  Centr.  Bakt,  II  Abt.,  39:  209-359,  1913. 


22  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Medium  46 

Urea  Soil  Extract^ 

Urea    (CO(NH2)2) 50.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Soil  extract  (stock) 100 . 0  cc. 

Tap  water 900 . 0  cc. 

iLoHNis,  F.  Centr.  BakL,  II  Abt.,  14:  714-723,  1905. 

Medium  47 

Urea  Bouillon  Gelatin  or  Agar 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 20.0  gm. 

Gelatin 120  to  150.0  gm. 

or 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Bouillon 1,000.0  cc. 

Reaction  about  pH  7.5. 

MEDIA  FOR  NITRIFYING  BACTERIA 

Medium  48 

Ammonium  Sulphate  Solution^ 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 2.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7HoO) trace 

Magnesium  carbonate  (MgCOs) excess 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

2  WiNOGRADKSY,  S.  Lafar's  "Handb.  techn.  mylol.,''  3:  132-181,  1904. 

In  order  to  prevent  any  loss  of  ammonia,  it  is  desirable  to 
sterilize  the  magnesium  carbonate  separately.  When  cool  add 
an  excess  of  the  magnesium  carbonate  to  each  flask. 

Medium  49 

Magnesium  Ammonium  Phosphate  Solution 

Magnesium  ammonium  phosphate  (MgNH4P04- 

6H2O) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 2.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04 -71120) trace 

Magnesium  carbonate  (MgCOs) 5.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  23 

Medium  50 

Sodium  Ammonium  Phosphate  Solution 
Sodium  ammonium  phosphate  (Na(NH4)HP04- 

4H2O) 3.4  gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 2.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Magnesium  carbonate  (MgCOs) excess 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

To  prevent  a  loss  of  ammonia  do  not  add  the  MgCOs  until 
after  sterilization 

Medium  51 

Sodium  Nitrite  Solution^ 

Sodium  nitrite  (NaN02) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  carbonate  (Na2C03) 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.3  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate   (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

1  Fred,  E.  B.,  and  A.  Davenport,  Soil  Sci.,  11:  389-404,  1921. 

Medium  52 
Medium  for  Oxidation  of  Ammonia  and  Nitrite  to  Nitrate 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 2.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Calcium  carbonate 5.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Add  the  calcium  carbonate  after  sterilization. 

Medium  53 
Washed  Agar  for  Nitrifying  Bacteria 

Agar  (washed)2 25.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

2  Allow  the  agar  to  wash  in  running  water  for  5  to  7  days,  and  dry  at  60°C. 


24  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Tube  the  agar  in  10-cubic  centimeter  portions  and  sterilize. 
To  this  melted  agar,  at  45°C.  in  tubes  or  Petri  dishes,  add  1- 
cubic  centimeter  portion  of  the  following  salts. 

1.  Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.5    gm. 

Water 100.0    cc. 

2.  Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 1.5    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.75  gm. 

Ferric  sulphate  (Fe2(S04)3-9H20) 0.02  gm. 

Water 100.0    cc. 

3.  Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 3.0    gm. 

Sodium  carbonate  (Na2C03) 1.5    gm. 

Tap  water 100.0    cc. 

4.  Sodium  nitrite  (NaN02) 1.5    gm. 

Sodium  carbonate  (Na2C03) 1.5    gm. 

Water 100.0    cc. 

5.  Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.45  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) 0 .  75  gm. 

Ferric  sulphate  (Fe2(S04)3-9H20) 0.02  gm. 

Water 100.0    cc. 

For  ammonia  oxidation  add  1  cubic  centimeter  of  the  stock 
solutions  numbers  1,  2,  and  3,  to  10  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
melted  agar. 

For  the  nitrite  oxidation,  add  1  cubic  centimeter  of  stock 
solutions  numbers  1,  4,  and  5. 

Agar  media  prepared  in  this  way  should  remain  clear. 

Medium  54 
SiLicio  AoiD  Gel  for  Nitrite-forming  Bacteria 

Prepare  a  series  of  silica-gel  plates,  according  to  the  method 
outlined  on  p.  6.  To  each  plate  add  2.5  cubic  centimeters  of 
the  medium  (a),  1  cubic  centimeter  of  medium  (6),  1  drop  of 
(c)  and  a  few  drops  of  (d)  to  give  a  milky  appearance.  Mix 
the  solutions  and  place  the  open  plates  in  incubator,  at  60°C., 
to  evaporate  excess  of  surface  liquid. 

(a)   Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 1.5  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7HoO) 0 .  25  gm. 

Distilled  water 100.0  cc. 

(6)   Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 100 . 0  cc. 

(c)  Saturated  sodium  chloride  solution. 

(d)  A  suspension  of  powdered  MgC03  in  distilled  water. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  25 

MEDIA  FOR  NITRATE-REDUCING  AND  DENITRIFYING  BACTERIA 

Medium  55 

AsPARAGiN  Nitrate-citrate  (Giltay's)  Solution 

(a)  Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 1.0  gm. 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3H2O) 1.0  gm.^ 

Distilled  water 250. 0  cc.  J 

(h)  Citric  acid  (CeHgOT-HsO) 5.0  gm.  ^ 

or  neutral  sodium  citrate 8.5  gm.y 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 1.0  gm.—  , 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm.-^^ 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCl2-6H20) 0.2  gm.   • 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCla-OHoO) trace  ~. 

Distilled  water 250 . 0  cc.   - 

Neutralize  the  citric  acid  solution  with  a  10  per  cent  solution 
of  sodium  or  potassium  hydroxide,  using  phenolphthalein  as  an 
indicator.  Mix  the  two  solutions  and  add  sufficient  water  to 
make  1000.0  cubic  centimeters.  If  the  asparagin  and  potassium 
nitrate  are  dissolved  along  with  the  other  salts,  a  decomposition 
may  occur.  This  is  marked  by  a  browning  of  the  liquid  due 
to  the  presence  of  nitrous  acid. 

For  a  solid  medium  add  15  grams  of  agar  to  1  liter. 

Medium  56 

Potassium  Nitrate-glucose  Solution 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCl2-6H20) 0.5  gm. 

Glucose 10.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Medium  57 

Potassium  Nitrate-ethyl  alcohol  Solution^ 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 10.0  gm. 

Ethyl  alcohol  (C2H5OH) 5.0  cc. 

Tap  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

1  Beijerinck,  M.  W.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  25:  35,    1910. 


26  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Medium  58 
Potassium  Nitrate-filter  Papers 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 2.5  gm. 

Filter  paper  in  strips 20 . 0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

I  Van  Iterson,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  11:  689,  1904. 

Medium  59 
Potassium  Nitrate-thiosulphate  Solution^ 

Sodium  thiosulphate  (Na2S203-5H20) 5.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 5.0  gm. 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCOs) 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2  gm. 

Magnesium  chloride  (MgCU'OHoO) 0.1  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCl2-6H20) trace 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCl3-6H20) trace 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2L1ESKE,  R.,  Ber.  d.  Deutsch.  Bot.  Gessell,  30:  12-22,  1912. 

MEDIA  FOR  THE  REDUCTION  OF  SULPHATES  AND  OTHER 
SULPHUR  COMPOUNDS 

Medium  60 

ASPARAGIN-SODIUM   LACTATE    SOLUTION^ 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3H2O) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  lactate  (NaC3H503) 5.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

3  Van  Delden,  A.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  11:  83,  1904. 

Medium  61 

Sodium  Lactate-ammonium  Sulphate  Solution 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  lactate  (NaCsHsOs) 5.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

To  prepare  a  solid  medium  add  the  above  ingredients  to  15 
per  cent  gelatin.     Heat  the  medium  in  a  steamer  until  the 


CULTURE  MEDIA  27 

precipitate  has  settled,  and  filter.  Sterilize  at  a  low  temperature, 
about  10  pounds'  pressure  for  15  minutes,  or  in  the  steamer  for 
20  minutes  for  3  consecutive  days. 

Medium  62 

Ye  AST- WATER   S  ODIUM    SULPHITE    AgAR 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCl3-6H20)  or  strip  of  iron.  ...  0.1  gm. 

Sodium  sulphite  (Na2S03) 1.0  gm. 

Yeast  water 1 ,000 . 0  cc. 

Reaction  pH 7.0. 

For  the  culture  of  certain  microorganisms  it  is  desirable  to  add 
3  per  cent  of  sucrose. 

Medium  63 

ASPARAGIN-SODIUM   LACTATE    GeLATIN 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3H2O) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  lactate  (NaCsH.^Os) 5.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Iron-ammonium    sulphate    (FeS04-(NH4)2 

(S04)-6H.O) trace 

Gelatin 120.0  to  150.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 .0  cc. 

Sterilize  in  the  autoclave  at  10  pounds'  pressure  for  15  minutes. 
Cool  in  ice  water. 

Medium  64 

Beef  Extract-sodium  Sulphite  Agar^ 

Agar 30 . 0  gm. 

Beef  extract 3.0  gm. 

Peptone 5.0  gm. 

Glucose 7 10.0  gm. 

Sodium  sulphite,  20  per  cent  solution 10 . 0  cc. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  Wilson,  W.  J.,  and  E.  Maud  McV.  Blair,  J.  Hijg.,  24:  111-119,  1925. 

Adjust  the  reaction  to  pH  6.6  to  7.0. 

Add  the  glucose  just  before  sterilization  and  fill  in  small  flasks 
of  100  cubic  centimeters  each.  To  100  cubic  centimeters  of  this 
agar  while  melted  add  1  cubic  centimeter  of  sterile  8  per  cent 
ferric  chloride  (FeCl3-6H20)  solution,  0.6  cubic  centimeter  of  a 


28  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

10  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  (NaOH)  solution  and  10.0  cubic 
centimeters  of  a  20  per  cent  sodiuni  sulphite  (Na2S03)  solu- 
tion. Now  dilute  this  agar  medium  with  an  equal  amount  of 
a  water  suspension  of  the  bacteria.     Pour  deep  plates. 

MEDIA  FOR  SULPHUR-OXIDIZING  BACTERIA 
Medium  65 

Thiosulphate  Solution^ 

Sodium  thiosulphate  (Na2S203-5H20) 5.0  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 0.1  gm. 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCOs) 1.0  gm. 

Disodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04-2H20) 0 . 2  gm. 

Magnesium  chloride  (MgCl2-6H20) 0.1  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  Beijerinck,  M.  W.,  Centr.  Bakt,  II  Abt.,  11:  593-599,  1904. 

Sterilize  the  thiosulphate  and  acid  carbonate  separately  in  a 
small  amount  of  water  and  when  cool  add  to  the  solution  of  the 
other  salts.  A  trace  of  ferrous  sulphate  (sterile  solution)  should 
also  be  added  after  sterilization. 

Medium  66 
Thiosulphate-nitrate  Solution- 

Sodium  thiosulphate  (Na2S203-5H20) 2.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 10  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 0.1  gm. 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCOs) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  chloride   (MgCl2-6H20) 0.1  gm. 

Disodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04-2H20) 0 . 2  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2TRAUTWEIN,  K.,  Centr.  Bakt.  II  Abt.,  53:  513-548,  1921. 

Medium  67 

Thiosulphate-agar3 

Sodium  thiosulphate  (Na2S203-5H20) 5.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.1  gm. 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCOs) 0 . 2  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 0. 1  gm. 

Agar 20.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

3  Beijerinck,  M.  W.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  11:  593-599,  1904. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  29 

For  certain  organisms  it  is  advisable  to  add  an  excess  of 
CaCOs. 

Medium  68 

Sulphur-phosphate  Medium^ 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 0.2    gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 3.0    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5    gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCU-GHsO) 0 .  25  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) trace 

Sulphur,  powdered 10 . 0    gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0    cc. 

1  Waksman,  S.  a.,  Soil  Set.,  13:  329,  1922. 

The  sulphur  is  weighed  out  into  the  individual  containers, 
usually  1-gram  portions  into  250-cubic  centimeter  Erlenmeyer 
flasks,  and  100-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  the  liquid  medium 
added.  The  reaction  of  the  medium  is  about  pH  4.0.  The 
flasks  are  sterilized  in  flowing  steam  on  3   consecutive  days. 

Medium  69 

SODIUM-THIOSULPHATE    AgAR2 

Agar 20 . 0  gm. 

Sodium  thiosulphate  (Na2Si03-5H20) 5.0  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 0.1  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaClo-GHzO) 0 .  25  gm. 

Magnesium  chloride  (MgCl2-6H20) 0.1  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 3.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

2  Waksman,  S.  A.,  /.  Bad.,  7:  605,  1922. 

The  medium  is  prepared  as  usual  and  sterilized  at  15  pounds' 
pressure  for  15  minutes. 

Medium  70 
Solution  for  the  Reduction  of  Hydrogen  Sulphide 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 1.5    gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 0 .  05  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.05  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0 .  05  gm. 

Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(N03)2) 0.01  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 10 . 0    gm. 


30 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


Sterilize  in  small  flasks  or  tubes.  After  inoculation  incubate 
under  an  atmosphere  of  hydrogen  sulphide  as  shown  below.  ^  To 
obtain  a  solid  medium,  the  amount  of  CaCOs  in  the  above  solu- 
tion is  increased  to  50  gm.  per  liter  and  0.5  per  cent  agar  is  added. 


JS^ 


Fig.  1. — Apparatus  for  the  cultivation  of  pure  cultures  of  sulfur  bacteria  using 
H2S  as  a  source  of  energy.  A,  apparatus  for  generation  of  H2S;  B,  hydrogen 
tank;  C,  wash  flask;  D,  gasometer;  E,  culture  jar;  F,  manometer.      {Bavendamm.) 

1  Bavendamm,  W.,  Die  farblosen  und  roten  Schwefelbakterien  des 
Siiss-  und  Salzwassers.     G.  Fischer.     Jena,  1924. 


MEDIA  FOR  HYDROGEN  AND  METHANE  BACTERIA 

Medium  71 

Potassium  Nitrate  Solution  for  Hydrogen  Bacteria^ 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 2.0  gm. 

Mono-sodium  phosphate  (NaH2P04) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeClg-eHzO) trace 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

^Lebedeff,  A.  E.,  (Russian).     Odessa,  1910. 


Cultures  grown  in  an  atmosphere  of  hydrogen  containing  5  to 
15  per  cent  carbon  dioxide. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  31 

Medium  72 
Ammonium  Chloride  Solution  for  Hydrogen  Bacteria* 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCOs) 1.0  gm. 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 1.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  carbonate  (FeC03-H20) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.1  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.1  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

pH  =  7.1  -  7.2. 

'  RuHLAND,  W.,  Jahrh.  Wissen.  BoL,  63:  321,  1924. 

Use  freshly  prepared  NaHCOs.  Iron  must  be  added  in  the 
form  of  ferrous  carbonate.  A  sterile  solution  of  the  iron  salt  in 
water  containing  CO2  is  added  to  the  sterile  medium.  The 
culture  is  grown  in  an  atmosphere  containing  hydrogen  and 
carbon  dioxide. 

Medium  73 


Magnesium  Ammonium  Phosphate  Solution  for  Methane  Bacteria^ 

Magnesium    ammonium    phosphate    (MgNH4- 

P04-6HoO) 0.1    gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0 .05  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaS04-2H20) 0 .  01  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000        cc. 

2  Sohngen,  N.  L.,  Bot.  Centr.,  105:  371-372,  1907. 

The  cultures  are  placed  in  an  atmosphere  consisting  of  1  part 
methane  (CH4)  and  2  parts  air. 

Silica  gel  or  washed  agar  containing  the  above  nutrients  can 
be  conveniently  used  as  solid  media. 

MEDIA  FOR  IRON  AND  MANGANESE  OXIDIZING  BACTERIA 

Medium  74 

Iron-ammonium  Sulphate  Solution^ 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 1-5    gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 0 .  05  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.05  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0 .05  gm. 

Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(N03)2) 0.01  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0    cc. 

sLieske,  R.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  49:  413-425,  1919. 


32  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Sterilize  in  small  flasks  in  layers  about  2  centimeters  deep. 
Allow  the  medium  to  stand  for  several  days  so  that  it  becomes 
saturated  with  oxygen  and  carbon  dioxide.  After  standing,  add 
to  each  flask  about  0.05  grams  of  sterilized  iron  dust  and  inoculate. 

Medium  75 

Manganese-ammonium  Sulphate  Solution 

Manganese  bicarbonate,  saturated  solution 100.0  cc. 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCOa) 0.1  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 0.1  gm 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) trace 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) trace 

Tap  water 900.0  cc. 

The  manganese  bicarbonate  is  prepared  by  saturating  a  sus- 
pension of  manganese  carbonate  with  pure  carbon  dioxide.  The 
medium  is  sterilized  in  flowing  steam  for  25  minutes. 

Medium  76 

Ferrous  Carbonate  and  Potassium  Acetate  Solution 

Potassium  acetate  (KC2H3O2) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  carbonate  (FeCOa) 0.5  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

MEDIA  FOR  NITROGEN  FIXING  BACTERIA 

Medium  77 
Nitrogen-free  Mannitol  Solution 

Mannitol 10.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.2  gm. 

Manganese  sulphate  (MnS04-4H20) trace 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCla-OHzO) trace 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

For  a  solid  medium  add  12.5  to  15  grams  of  washed  agar  to 
each  liter.  For  the  isolation  of  Azotobacter  prepare  this  liquid 
medium  in  shallow  layers  and  add  sterilized  CaCOs  to  each  flask. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  33 

Medium  78 

Nitrate  Mannitol  Agar,  with  and  without  Indicators 
Same  as  Medium  77  except  that  0.5  gram  of  potassium  nitrate 
(KNO3)  is  added  to  each  Uter  and  an  indicator  if  desired. 

Indicators. — A.  Brom  thymol  blue  medium  is  prepared  as 
follows:  add  5  cubic  centimeters  of  0.5  per  cent  alcoholic  solu- 
tion to  1  liter  of  the  medium. 

B.  Congo  Red  medium  is  prepared  as  follows:  add  10  cubic 
centimeters  of  a  1  to  400  aqueous  solution  to  1  Uter  of  the 
medium. 

Medium  79 

Yeast  Extract-mannitol  Agar 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Mannitol 10.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.1  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 3.0  gm. 

Yeast  water^  (reaction  pH  6.8) 100.0  cc. 

Distilled  water 900.0  cc. 

^  For  directions  how  to  make  stock  yeast  extract  see  Medium  27,  page 
16. 

If  this  medium  is  to  be  used  for  the  isolation  of  root  nodule 
bacteria  add  Congo  red  as  given  under  B  in  Medium  78. 

Medium  80 

Carrot  Extract  Agar^ 

Wash  the  carrots  in  running  water  until  all  soil  particles  are 
removed,  then  chop  (with  meat  chopper)  into  small  pieces  and 
prepare  as  follows. 

Carrots  (cut) 250. 0  gm. 

Tap  water 500.0  cc. 

Cook  in  a  steamer  for  30  minutes  and  filter.  Neutralize  to 
pH  7.0  to  7.2  with  a  strong  solution  of  sodium  carbonate  and 

2  Stapp,  C.  und  G.  Ruschmann,  Arh.  a.  d.  Biol.  Reich,  f.  Landw.  u.  Forst., 
13 :  314,  1925. 


34  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

make  up  to  500  cubic  centimeters.  Now  add  500  cubic  centi- 
meters of  3.6  per  cent  neutral  water  solution  of  agar.  Tube  and 
sterilize.  Avoid  excessive  heating  because  the  carrot  extract 
becomes  more  acid  after  long  heating. 

Medium  81 

Pea  Extract  Sucrose  Solution 

Pea  seedlings  3  to  5  inches  tall  (net  weight) 300 . 0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Heat  in  the  steamer  for  4  to  5  hours  and  then  boil  for  1  hour 
over  a  free  flame.  Filter  and  make  up  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters. 
Add  sucrose,  2  per  cent,  and  0.5  per  cent  of  CaCOs.  This 
medium  contains  about  50  milligrams  of  nitrogen  in  100  cubic 
centimeters. 

Medium  82 

Navy-bean  Seed  Extract  Sucrose  Medium 

Bean  seed  (dry) 250 . 0  gm. 

Tap  water 2,500 . 0  cc. 

Soak  the  beans  in  the  cold  water  for  2  to  3  hours.  Now  add 
water  to  make  2,500  cubic  centimeters  and  heat  in  the  steamer 
for  2  hours.  Filter  and  make  up  to  2,500  cubic  centimeters. 
Add  1  per  cent  of  sucrose  and  0.5  per  cent  of  CaCOs.  This 
medium  contains  about  40  milligrams  of  nitrogen  in  100  cubic 
centimeters. 

Medium  83 

Caffein-bean  Extract-glucose  for  Bacteroid  Formation^ 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Cafifein  (C8HioN402-H20) 2.0  gm. 

Glucose 10.0  gm. 

Bean  extract2 1,000 . 0  cc. 

iZipPEL,  H.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  32:  107-131,  1911. 

2  Bean  extract :  Add  to  20  grams  of  powdered  navy-bean  seed  in  a  mortar 
20  cubic  centimeters  of  A^/1  KOH.  Allow  this  to  stand  a  few  minutes,  then 
add  water  sufficient  to  make  1  Hter.  This  should  stand  24  hours.  Siphon 
off  the  clear  liquid,  neutralize  with  phosphoric  acid. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  35 

Medium  84 
Peptone-sucrose  Solution  for  Gum 

Peptone 1.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 2.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.1  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCl2) 0.1  gm. 

Sucrose 20 . 0  gm 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

MEDIA  FOR  CELLULOSE-DECOMPOSING  ORGANISMS 

Medium  85 

Ammonium  Sulphate-cellulose  Solution^-^ 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 2.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) trace 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

^  Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI),  diammonium  phosphate  ((NH4)2HP04), 
potassium  nitrate  (KNO3),  or  sodium  nitrate  (NaNOs)  may  also  be  used. 
2OMELIANSKY,  W.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  8:  226,  1902. 

Fill  large  test  tubes  about  one-third  full.  Add  two  or  three 
strips  of  filter  paper  to  each  tube,  part  of  the  paper  protruding, 
above  the  surface  of  the  medium.  When  nitrates  are  used,  the 
calcium  carbonate  may  be  left  out. 

Medium  86 
Silica-gel  Cellulose 

Prepare  a  series  of  silica-gel  plates  according  to  Souleyre 
method. 

Silica  Gel  according  to  Souleyre^ 
(Modified) 

To  40  cubic  centimeters  of  20  per  cent  tartaric  acid,  1  cubic 
centimeter  of  60  per  cent  phosphoric  acid  and  1  cubic  centimeter 
sulphuric  acid  (1:1),  add  100  cubic  centimeters  of  potassium  silicate 
solution  (specific  gravity,  1.057).^  Let  stand  until  clear,  then 
filter  off  the  clear  solution.     This  is  designated  as  solution  A. 

3  Souleyre,  M.,  Compt.  rend.  d.  la  Soc.  Biol.,  93:  306,  1925. 
^  7.6  grams  potassium  silicate  made  up  to  100-cubic  centimeters  solution 
gives  specific  gravity  =  1.057. 


36  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Solution  B  is  made  by  mixing  two  parts  of  potassium  silicate 
solution  (specific  gravity,  1.085)^  with  one  part  of  a  1  per  cent 
KOH  solution.  This  solution  will  gel  on  standing.  The  alkali 
solution  (1  per  cent)  should  be  mixed  with  the  silicate  solution 
to  make  Solution  B  only  a  short  time  before  it  is  to  be  used.  The 
solution  will  keep  for  about  2  weeks  to  1  month. 

These  two  solutions  are  then  titrated  against  each  other  with 
an  indicator,  which  shows  the  reaction  desired. 

The  solutions  can  be  sterilized.  Solution  A  is  sterilized  in  an 
autoclave  for  10  minutes  at  110°C.  Solution  B,  however,  will 
solidify  if  treated  in  a  like  manner.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to 
put  it  in  a  sterile  flask  and  boil  for  5  to  10  minutes. 

For  growth  of  bacteria,  a  medium  is  prepared  as  follows: 

1.  100  cubic  centimeters  of  A,  and  50  cubic  centimeters 
distilled  water. 

2.  200  cubic  centimeters  of  nutrient  liquid  (preferably  steri- 
lized longer  than  the  silicate  solution). 

3.  Amount  of  B  required  to  bring  medium  to  desired  reac- 
tion. These  three  solutions  are  cooled  as  rapidly  as  possible 
after  sterilization,  and  are  then  poured  together.  Plates  can 
then  be  poured  without  danger  of  the  gel  solidifying  before 
pouring  is  completed.  Time  required  for  setting  of  the  gel  is  1 
to  6  hours. 

Five  grams  of  thoroughly  ground  cellulose  is  suspended  in 
100  cubic  centimeters  of  the  following  solution. 

Diammonium  phosphate  ((NH4)2HP04) 5.0    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0    gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeS04-7H20) 0.02  gm. 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 1.0    gm. 

Distilled  water 100.0    cc. 

About  2  cubic  centimeters  of  the  suspension  of  the  cellulose  in 
the  medium  is  poured  upon  the  surface  of  each  sihca  plate,  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  have  the  cellulose  uniformly  distributed 
over  the  surface;  some  CaCOs  is  then  powdered  on  over  the 
whole  surface  of  each  plate.  The  plates  are  placed  in  an  incu- 
bator at  60  to  65°C.,  until  the  excess  of  water  has  evaporated, 

1  11.6  grams  potassium  silicate  made  up  to  100-cubic  centimeters  solution 
gives  specific  gravity  =  1.085. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  37 

without  allowing  the  plate  to  become  dry.     The  dishes  are  kept 
until  needed  for  use. 


Medium  87 

Ammonium  Sulphate  Cellulose  Agar^ 

(a)  Agar 10 . 0  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 1.0  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 2.0  gm. 

Tap  water 500.0  cc. 

(6)   Cellulose  solution 500. 0  cc. 

1  McBeth,  I.  G.,  Soil  Sci.,  1:  438,  1916. 

1.  Pour  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  ammonium  hydroxide, 
specific  gravity  0.90,  into  a  glass-stoppered  bottle;  add  250  cubic 
centimeters  of  distilled  water  and  75  grams  of  pure  copper 
carbonate;  shake  the  solution  vigorously  until  all  the  copper  is 
dissolved  (about  10  to  15  minutes  are  ordinarily  required). 

2.  To  the  copper-ammonium  solution  add  15  grams  of  high- 
grade  sheet  filter  paper;  shake  vigorously  at  intervals  of  10 
minutes  for  3-^  hour.  Examine  the  solution  carefully  to  see  that 
the  paper  is  completely  dissolved.  If  any  particles  of  paper 
remain  in  the  solution,  the  shaking  must  be  continued  until  the 
solution  is  perfectly  clear.  Dilute  250  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
ammonium-copper-cellulose  solution  to  10  liters  with  tap  water; 
add  slowly,  with  frequent  shaking,  a  weak  hydrochloric  acid 
solution  prepared  by  adding  500  cubic  centimeters  of  concentrated 
acid  to  10  liters  of  tap  water.  Continue  the  addition  of  the 
acid  until  the  blue  color  disappears;  add  a  slight  excess  of  acid, 
shake  thoroughly,  and  allow  to  stand  a  few  minutes.  The  finely 
precipitated  cellulose  will  rise  to  the  top,  due  to  the  large  quantity 
of  free  hydrogen  liberated  in  the  precipitation  process.  Shake 
the  solution  vigorously  at  intervals  of  a  few  minutes  to  dislodge 
the  hydrogen.  As  soon  as  the  free  hydrogen  has  escaped,  the 
cellulose  will  settle  rapidly. 

3.  Wash  through  repeated  changes  of  water  until  free  from 
copper  and  chlorine.     After  the  washing  is  complete,  bring  the 


38  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

cellulose  in  the  solution  up  to  0.5  per  cent  by  allowing  to  settle  a 
few  days  and  siphoning  off  the  clear  solution  or  by  evaporating. 
Add  the  nutrient  salts  desired,  together  with  1  per  cent  of 
thoroughly  washed  agar;  heat  in  autoclave  or  boil  until  the  agar 
is  dissolved;  tube  and  sterilize  in  the  usual  way. 

Medium  88 

Cellulose-peptone  Agar 

Agar  (washed) 15.0    gm. 

Cellulose !  2.5    gm. 

Peptone 0 .  50  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2    gm. 

Potassium  carbonate  (K2CO3) 0.4    gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCU)  fused 0.02  gm. 

Ferric  sulphate  (Fe2(S04)3-9H20) 0 .02  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0.02  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0    cc. 

Dissolve  the  peptone  and  salts  in  100  cubic  centimeters  of 
distilled  water  and  filter.  Add  400  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
aqueous  cellulose  suspension  and  500  cubic  centimeters  of  3 
per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  washed  agar  (see  p.  5). 

Medium  89 
Cellulose-peptone  Medium  for  Thermophilic  Bacteria^ 

Peptone 5.0  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) excess 

Sodium  ammonium  phosphate  (Na(NH4)  HPO4- 

4H2O) 2.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 10  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.3  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaClo) 0.1  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCl3-6H20) trace 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  ViLJOEN,  J.  A.,  E.  B.  Fred,  and  W.  H.  Peterson,  /.  Agr.  Set.,  16:  1, 
1926. 

Reaction  about  pH  7.4.  Add  about  0.3  gram  of  paper  pulp 
or  of  cut  up  filter  paper  to  20  cubic  centimeters  of  liquid  in  long 
test  tubes. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  39 

MISCELLANEOUS  MEDDl 
Medium  90 
Litmus  or  Brom  Cresol  Purple  Milk 

Litmus  milk  is  one  of  the  most  important  culture  solutions. 
Because  of  the  great  variety  of  organisms  which  grow  in  it,  and 
the  decided  changes  which  they  produce,  litmus  milk  is  very 
useful  in  the  classification  of  bacteria.  All  organisms  should  be 
inoculated  into  litmus  milk  and  the  changes  after  various 
periods  of  time  recorded.  To  secure  the  best  results  prepare 
as   follows : 

Fresh  milk,  immediately  after  milking,  should  be  centrifuged 
and  this  fat-free  milk  taken  directly  to  the  laboratory.  Pipette 
5-  or  10- cubic  centimeter  portions  of  the  fresh  milk  into  pre- 
viously sterilized  test  tubes,  plug  with  cotton,  and  sterilize  for 
10  minutes  in  the  autoclave  at  8  to  10  -pounds^  pressure.  Cool  in 
water  and  repeat  sterilization  24  hours  later.  After  the  last 
sterilization  incubate  the  tubes  for  a  week  or  more  at  28  to  30°C. 
and  note  if  there  are  changes.  Now  add  to  each  tube  of  the 
bacteria  free  milk  about  2  to  3  drops  of  a  sterihzed  saturated 
solution  of  high-grade  lime-free  blue  litmus  (litmus  1  gram  and 
water,  15  cubic  centimeters).  Litmus  milk  should  give  a 
lavender  color,  not  too  deep,  which  turns  red  in  the  presence  of 
acids  and  blue  in  the  presence  of  alkalies. 

Brom  cresol  purple  may  be  used  in  place  of  litmus.  For 
this  purpose,  prepare  a  stock  solution  as  follows:  0.5  gm.  of 
brom-cresol  purple  should  be  ground  in  a  mortar  with  14  cubic 
centimeters  of  .V/10  sodium  hydroxide  and  made  up  to  100  cubic 
centimeters  with  distilled  water.  Take  10  cubic  centimeters  of 
this  0.5  per  cent  solution  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  milk  or 
about  2  to  3  drops  to  10  cubic  centimeters  of  milk. 

Medium  91 
Potato 

Select  large  potatoes,  wash  and  scrub  well  with  a  stiff  brush. 
Peel  and  cut  in  wedge-shaped  blocks  about  4  to  6  centimeters 
long  and  1.5  centimeters  wide.     The  size  will  depend  upon  the 


40  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

test  tubes.  Allow  the  cut  potatoes  to  stand  in  running  water 
for  at  least  12  hours. 

Place  a  small  piece  of  glass  rod  or  cotton  in  the  bottom  of  the 
test  tube  and  insert  the  potato  wedge  into  the  tube.  Fill  the 
tube  with  water  until  the  potato  is  entirely  under  the  liquid. 
Plug  and  sterilize:  about  15  minutes  at  10  pounds'  steam  pressure 
for  3  consecutive  days  will  usually  be  found  sufficient.  Just 
before  use,  pour  off  the  excess  water. 

Potatoes  prepared  in  this  way  should  retain  their  white 
color. 

Medium  92 

Mannitol  Glycero-phosphate  Solution 

Mannitol 10.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 0 . 2  gm. 

Calcium  glycero-phosphate 1.0  gm. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Adjust  reaction  to  pH  6.5  to  7.0. 

Medium  93 

Peptone-sucrose-lactose  Solution 

Sucrose 10.0  gm. 

Peptone 20 . 0  gm. 

Lactose 10.0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 2.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 2.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 1.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

Medium  94 
Peptone-sodium  Phosphate  Solution 

Peptone 10.0  gm. 

Disodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04-2H.>0)i 5 .0  gm. 

Carbohydrate 10.0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  To  prepare  disodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04-2H20)  take  ordinary 
disodium  phosphate  with  12  H2O  and  spread  it  out  on  filter  paper  and  allow 
it  to  remain  at  room  temperature  in  a  dry  place  for  2  weeks. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  41 

Reaction  pH  7.1  to  7.2. 

Media  92,  93,  94  are  recommended  for  lactic  acid-forming 
bacteria  of  milk  and  milk  products. 

Medium  95 
Malt  Extract-peptone  Solution 

Malt  (finely  ground) 30 . 0  gm. 

Peptone 10.0  gm. 

Lactose 20  to  40  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate 30 . 0  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

The  malt  is  extracted  in  the  water  by  boiling  for  1  hour;  the 
other  constituents  are  then  added. 

Medium  96 
Paraffin  Agar  for  Hydrocarbon-destroying  Organisms^ 

Ammonium  chloride  (NH4CI) 0.5  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Paraffin  oil 10.0  gm. 

Agar 20 . 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  Sohngen,  N.  L.,  Centr.  Bakt,  II  Abt.,  37:  595-609,  1913. 

Medium  97 
Solution  for  Fat  Decomposition^ 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 5.0  gm. 

Ammonium  phosphate  (NH4)3P04) 5.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7HoO) 1.0  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCl2) 1.0  gm. 

Ferric  chloride  (FeCl3-6H20) trace 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) trace 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

2  Rahn,  0.,  Centr.  Bakt.,  II  Abt.,  15 :  423,  1906. 

Molten  fat  is  placed  in  a  flask  and,  on  inclining  the  flask,  the 
fat  is  allowed  to  solidify.  The  above  nutrient  solution 
is  then  added.  Three-tenth  to  five-tenth  per  cent  of  finely 
powdered  fat  may  also  be  used  with  the  above  solution. 


42  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Medium  98 
Peptone-beef  Extract  Gelatin  Agar^ 

(a)  Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 5.0  gm. 

Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0.5  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.5  gm. 

Water ■ 100.0  ec. 

(6)  Gelatin 4.0  gm. 

Glucose 0 .  05  gm. 

Peptone 0.1  gm. 

Beef  infusion 5.0  cc. 

Water 400 . 0  cc. 

1  Frazier,  W.  C.,  J.  Inf.  Dis.,  39:  302,  1926. 

Pour  (a)  and  (h)  together,  heat  in  flowing  steam  and  mix  with 
500  cubic  centimeters  of  a  3  per  cent  agar  (washed)  solution. 

Adjust  pH  to  7.0. 

Pour  duplicate  plates  and  inoculate  in  the  center.  After 
48  hours  or  longer  at  30°C.  make  tests. 

Flood  one  plate  with  1  per  cent  tannic  acid  and  the  duplicate 
with  acid  HgCl2  solution.^ 

^HgCU  15  grams,  HCl  (Cone)  20  cubic  centimeters,  and  100  cubic 
centimeters  of  water. 

If  the  gelatin  has  been  changed,  a  clear  zone  will  appear  about 
the  giant  colony  in  the  plate  to  which  HgCl2  has  been  added. 
This  requires  15  to  30  minutes. 

The  tannic  acid  plate  will  show  the  amount  of  decomposition 
of  the  gelatin. 

Medium  99 
Casein  Hydrolysis  on  Milk  Agar 

(a)  Agar 15.0  gm. 

Water 500.0  cc. 

(6)   Milk 500.0  cc. 

Tube  separately  in  portions  for  plating.  Sterihze.  Cool  to 
45°C.  and  pour  plates  using  one  tube  of  each  per  plate. 

Streak  the  culture  to  be  tested  on  the  surface  of  the  milk  agar. 

After  incubation  examine  the  plates  for  clearing  along  line  of 
growth.  Flood  plates  with  dilute  acid  (HCl  1:10).  If  clearing 
remains,  it  denotes  true  hydrolysis  of  casein.  If  not,  it  is  weak 
acid  clearing. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  43 

Medium  100 
Sodium  Citrate  for  the  Colon  Aerogenes  Group^ 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 5.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.2  gm. 

Monoammonium  phosphate  (NH4H2-POi) 1.0  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 1.0  gm. 

Sodium  citrate  (S^^HaO) 2 .  77  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

1  KosER,  S.  A.,  J.  Bad.,  9:  63,  1924. 

Bacterium  coli  of  fecal  origin  is  unable  to  utilize  citrate,  while 
the  B.  aerogenes-cloacae  types  all  utilize  citrate. 

Medium  101 
Ferric  Ammonium  Citrate-nitrate  Solution 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2S04) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  nitrate  (NaNOs) 0.5  gm. 

Dipotassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 0.5  gm. 

Calcium  chloride  (CaCla) 0.2  gm. 

Ferric  ammonium  citrate 10.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

The  ferric  ammonium  citrate  should  be  sterilized  separately 
and  added  to  the  salt  solution  when  cool.  If  a  solid  medium  is 
wanted,  add  1.5  per  cent  of  agar. 

The  decomposition  of  the  organic  radical  is  accompanied  by 
the  precipitation  of  the  iron;  thus  in  an  agar  medium  brown 
zones  are  formed  around  the  colonies. 

Medium  102 
Corn  Mash 

Corn  meal  (not  degerminated) 50  to  80  gm. 

Tap  water 1,000  cc. 

Mix  the  corn  meal  with  cold  water.  Steam  for  2  to  3  hours 
and  tube  in  long  test  tubes.     Sterihze  for  2  hours  at  120°C. 

Medium  103 

Sheep-  or  Beef-brain  for  Anaerobic  Bacteria 

1.  Boil  sheep  brain  with  equal  volume  of  water. 

2.  Decant  water  (save)  and  press  brain  through  a  potato  ricer. 


44  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

3.  Add  decanted  water,  2  per  cent  peptone  and  0.1  per  cent 
glucose. 

4.  Tube  by  punching  through  the  fiUing  funnel  with  a  glass  rod. 

5.  Sterilize  intermittently  in  an  Arnold  sterilizer. 

Five  daily  runs  of  30  minutes  each  are  recommended.  Steri- 
lization in  an  autoclave  is  usually  a  failure  because  of  the  tendency 
of  the  medium  to  climb  on  to  the  plugs.  However,  if  long  tubes 
are  used,  this  medium  may  be  sterilized  in  the  autoclave.  The 
finished  medium  is  nearly  white  with  a  clear  supernatant  liquid. 

The  small  amount  of  glucose  is  to  stimulate  growth;  excess 
would  prevent  or  interfere  with  putrefaction  and  blackening. 
Peptone  stimulates  early  development  and  intensifies  the  blacken- 
ing produced  by  those  organisms  liberating  H2S. 

Medium  104 
Nitrate  Solution  for  Higher  Green  Plants 

(a)  Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(N03)2-4H,0) 100.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 25. 0  gm. 

Sodium  chloride  (NaCl) 15. 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000 . 0  cc. 

(h)    Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 25.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

(c)  Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 50 . 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000. 0  cc. 

(d)  Ferric  chloride  (FeCl;r6H20) 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 250 . 0  cc. 

Take  10  cubic  centimeter  portions  of  solutions  (a),  (6),  and 
(c)  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  water.  Add  1  to  2  drops  of 
solution  (d). 

Medium  105 

Solution  for  Growing  Higher  Plants 

(a)  Ammonium  nitrate  (NH4NO3) 32.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

(6)   Monocalcium  phosphate  (CaH4(P04) 2. H2O).  10.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

(c)  Potassium  sulphate  (K2SO4) 20 . 0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

(d)  Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 8.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1,000.0  cc. 

(e)  Ferric  chloride  (FeCla-OHzO) 0 . 1  gm. 

Distilled  water 250 .0  cc. 


CULTURE  MEDIA  45 

Prepared  with  ammonia-free  water  and  chemically  pure  salts. 
Dilute  10-cubic  centimeter  poritons  of  (a),  (6),  (c),  and  {d) 
and  1  cubic  centimeter  of  (e)  in  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  water. 
If  a  nitrogen-free  medium  is  desired,  omit  (a).  Plant  food  solu- 
tions should  be  renewed  at  regular  intervals  of  about  one  week 
each. 

Medium  106 
Modified  Crone's  Nitrogen-free  Solution^ 

Stock  Salt  Mixture: 

Potassium  chloride  (KCl) 10 . 0  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaS04-2H20) 2 . 5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgS04-7H20) 2.5  gm. 

Tricalcium  phosphate  (Ca3(P04)2) 2.5  gm. 

Ferric  phosphate  (FeP04) 2.5  gm. 

1  Bryan,  0.  C,  Soil  Sci.,  13,  279,  1922. 

Mix  all  of  these  salts  and  grind  to  a  fine  powder. 

Water 1,000.0  cc. 

Stock  salt  mixture 1.5  gm. 

If  a  solid  medium  is  wanted,  take  7.5  grams  of  washed  agar  to  1 
liter.  After  sterilization,  shake  until  salts  are  well  mixed  with 
agar  and  allow  to  harden. 

Medium  107 

Preserving  Stock  Cultures  in  Soil 

Mix  equal  parts  of  a  fertile  soil  of  neutral  reaction  with  sand. 
Fill  into  test  tubes,  about  2-inch  layers  and  sterilize  without 
cotton  plugs  for  5  to  6  hours  at  120°C.  Now  add  sterihzed  water 
to  bring  the  moisture  of  the  soil  to  about  two-thirds  saturation 
and  plug  tubes  with  cotton.  Again  sterilize  for  2  hours.  Add 
to  a  few  of  the  tubes,  glucose  niitrient  broth  and  incubate  for 
at  least  a  week.  If  there  are  no  signs  of  growth,  the  soil  tubes 
are  ready  for  use.  To  prevent  mold  growth,  through  plugs,  store 
these  tubes  in  a  dry  place. 

Medium  108 
Preserving  Stock  Cultures  in  Corn  Mash 

Same  as  Medium  102.  This  medium  will  be  found  useful  for 
cultures  of  lactic-acid-forming  bacteria. 


46  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Medium  109 

Preserving   Stock   Cultures  in   Meat  Infusion,   Peptone,  Gelatin 

Phosphate  Agar^ 

Medium  110 
Preservation  of  Stock  Cultures  in  Vacuo^ 

111 

Preserving  Plate  Cultures 

Washed  agar 20 . 0  gm. 

Glycerol  (C3H5(OH)3) 500.0  cc. 

Distilled  water 500 . 0  cc. 

Dissolve  the  agar  in  the  water  by  heating  in  a  steamer,  add  the 
glycerol,  and  filter  through  glass  wool. 

FAVORABLE  CONDITIONS  FOR  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF 
ANAEROBIC  BACTERIA 

Living  Vegetable  Tissue 

To  an  ordinary  desiccator  or  a  museum  jar  with  tightly  fitting 
cover  add  finely  chopped  raw  potato,  carrots,  lettuce  or  similar 
vegetable  tissue.  If  potato  is  used,  about  50  grams  per  liter  of 
air  will  be  found  satisfactory.  Now  add  the  tubes  or  plate 
cultures  of  bacteria  and  seal  the  jar.  The  respiring  plant  tissue 
rapidly  absorbs  the  free  oxygen  and  gives  off  CO2  thus  bringing 
about  favorable  conditions  for  the  growth  of  anaerobic  bacteria. 

Sterile  milk  plus  a  small  amount  of  methylene  blue  may  be 
used  as  an  indicator  for  anaerobiosis. 

Pyrogallic  Acid  for  Absorbing  Oxygen 

For  every  100  cubic  centimeters  of  air  space  take  1  gram  of 
pyrogallic  acid  and  10  cubic  centimeters  of  a  10  per  cent  solution 
of  sodium  or  potassium  hydroxide. 

Note. — To  prepare  an  anaerobic  jar,  cover  the  bottom  of 
the  jar  with  3^-inch  layer  of  pyrogalUc  acid.  Fit  the 
cover  tightly  to  the  jar  with  vaseline  and  remove  the  air  with  a 
suction  pump,  and  when  there  is  a  good  vacuum,  run  in  75  to  100 
cubic  centimeters  alkali  solution. 

1  Ayres,  S.  H..  and  W.  T.  Johnson,  J.  BacL,  9:  112,  1924. 

2  Brown,  J.  H.,  Science,  64:  429,  1926. 


PART  II 
METHODS  OF  STAINING  OF  BACTERIA 

The  general  structure  of  bacteria  and  other  microorganisms 
is  most  easily  seen  in  stained  preparations.  The  process  of 
staining  consists  in  smearing  a  suspension  of  the  organisms  over 
a  clean  slide,  drying  at  room  temperature,  fixing  to  the  glass  by 
passing  through  a  flame  two  or  three  times  (do  not  burn)  and 
staining  the  film  by  one  of  the  methods  outlined  below.  After 
staining,  the  film  is  washed  in  running  water,  dried  with  a  blotter, 
and  examined.  To  preserve  the  mount,  a  small  drop  of  balsam 
is  placed  over  the  film  and  the  cover  glass  is  pressed  down  gently 
to  force  out  the  excess  of  balsam.  Set  the  slide  in  a  warm  place 
to  dry. 

Some  of  the  most  important  laboratory  stains  are  (1)  methy- 
lene blue  or  thionin,  (2)  crystal  violet,  (3)  fuchsin,  (4)  erythrosin, 
and  (5)  nigrosin.  Stock  solutions  of  methylene  blue,  thionin, 
crystal  violet,  and  fuchsin  should  be  prepared  and  kept  on  hand. 
For  the  stocks,  make  a  saturated  solution  of  the  dyes  in  95  per 
cent  ethyl  alcohol.  Filter  through  paper  a  small  amount  of  the 
dye  and  dilute  as  given  in  the  directions. 

For  quick  preparations,  not  deeply  stained,  the  methylene 
blue  will  be  found  satisfactory.  Fuchsin,  on  the  other  hand, 
possesses  unusual  penetrating  power  for  staining  bacterial  cells 
and  spores  and  will  be  found  useful  for  a  great  many  kinds  of 
bacteria.  If  heated  these  dyes  penetrate  much  more  rapidly 
and  thus  give  more  deeply  stained  mounts. 

Loeffler's  Alkaline-methylene  Blue 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  methylene  blue 30.0  cc. 

Solution   of  potassium  hydroxide  in  distilled  water 

(1 :  10,000) 100 . 0  cc. 

Ziehl's  Carbol-fuchsin 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  basic  fuchsin 10.0  cc. 

Carbolic  acid,  5  per  cent  aqueous  solution 100.0  cc. 

47 


48  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

If  used  in  staining  root-nodule  bacteria  dilute  the  carbol 
fuchsin  1  part  of  stain  to  9  parts  of  distilled  water. 

Gram  Stain 

This  is  one  of  the  most  important  methods  of  staining  employed 
in  a  study  of  bacteria.  It  is  commonly  used  to  distinguish 
certain  organisms  from  others  and  also  to  show  the  general 
morphology.  It  has  been  found  that  when  stained  with  gentian 
or  crystal  violet,  and  treated  with  an  iodine  solution,  some 
organisms  are  easily  decolorized  while  others  are  much  more 
difficult  to  decolorize..  The  method  follows.  Prepare  a  thin 
smear  of  the  culture  on  a  slide.  Dry  in  the  air  and  fix  with  heat. 
Stain  1  minute  with  the  crystal  violet  dye  and  then  treat  with  the 
iodine  solution  for  1  minute. 

Crystal  Violet 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  crystal  violet 10.0  cc. 

Ammonium  oxalate,  1  per  cent  aqueous  solution 40.0  cc. 

Lugol's  Iodine  Solution 

Iodine 1.0  gm. 

Potassium  iodide 2.0  gm. 

Water 300.0  cc. 

Decolorize  for  30  seconds  in  95  per  cent  alcohol.  Wash 
between  each  step.  Counter  stain  for  10  seconds  with  safranin. 
Wash  and  dry. 

Safranin 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  safranin 10.0  cc. 

Distilled  water 100.0  cc. 

If  gram-positive,  the  cells  should  retain  the  crystal  violet 
stain  and  thus  appear  under  the  microscope  as  a  deep  violet. 
If  gram-negative,  the  cells  are  decolorized  by  the  alcohol  and 
thus  show  a  pale  pink  color. 

Carbol  Thionin  (Nicolle's) 

Prepare  a  stock  saturated  alcohoUc  solution  of  thionin  in  50 
per  cent  alcohol. 

Take  10  cubic  centimeters  of  this  saturated  solution  of  thionin 
and  100  cubic  centimeters  of  a  2  per  cent  carbohc  acid  solution. 


METHODS  OF  STAINING  OF  BACTERIA  49 

This  is  an  excellent  bacterial  stain. 

Erythrosin^ 

(a)  Erythrosin 5.0  gm. 

Alcohol  (70  per  cent) 100 . 0  cc. 

(6)   Erythrosin 1.0  gm. 

Carbolic  acid  (5  per  cent) 100 . 0  cc. 

This  stain  is  especially  recommended  for  root-nodule  bacteria. 

1.  Place  a  drop  of  the  fresh  culture  on  a  glass  slide,  tilt  the 
slide  to  allow  drop  to  spread.  Dry  the  film  in  an  oven  at  45°C. 
and  fix  in  absolute  alcohol. 

2.  After  the  alcohol  evaporates,  flood  the  mount  with  (a)  and 
allow  to  stain  for  10  minutes. 

3.  If  the  stain  is  not  deep  enough,  wash  off  this  alcohol  ery- 
throsin and  again  stain  with  (6)  for  10  minutes. 

1  WiNOGRADSKY,  S.  Ann.  Inst.  Pasteur,  39:  325,  1925;  Gangulee,  N. 
Ann.  Appl.  Biol,  13:  364,  1926. 

Capsule  Stain  Adapted  from  Dorner  Spore  Stain 

1.  Spread  a  loopful  of  culture  on  clean  glass  slide.  Air  dry 
and  do  not  fix. 

2.  Stain  1  to  2  minutes  with  cold  carbol  fuchsin.  Wash 
gently  in  water. 

3.  Cover  with  thin  layer  of  nigrosin  by  spreading  a  loopful 
of  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  nigrosin.  Dry  quickly  to 
prevent  decolorization  of  the  cells. 

Cells  will  be  red  and  capsules  white  against  a  blue-gray 
background. 

Capsule  Stain.     Negative  Method  with  Ink 

Place  a  loopful  of  liquid  culture  on  a  clean  glass  slide.  Add 
to  it  a  loopful  of  ink  (small  loop  carrying  about  one-fourth  as 
much  liquid).  Cover  with  a  cover  slip  and  examine  as  a  wet 
mount.  The  bacteria  will  be  white  against  a  gray  background; 
their  capsules  will  be  unstained  and  appear  as  halos  around  the 
denser  bacterial  cells. 

By  this  method  one  can  demonstrate  some  capsules  which 
cannot  be  stained  by  any  positive  staining  method. 

The  ink  to  be  used  is  Burri's  Pelikan  Tusche,  No.  541  (Griibler). 
It  is  bacteria  free  when  received  and  must  be  kept  aseptically. 


50  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Ordinary  India  ink  cannot  be  used  because  of  the  bacteria  which 
it  contains. 

Spore  Stain  (Dorner  Modified) 

1.  Spread  a  loopful  of  culture,  suspension  or  liquid  culture, 
on  a  clean  glass  slide ;  dry  and  fix  by  heat. 

2.  Cover  with  Ziehl's  carbol  fuchsin.  Steam  over  water 
bath  for  10  to  20  minutes.  Do  not  allow  fuchsin  to  dry  on  smear. 
Add  more  fuchsin  if  needed.     Wash  in  water. 

3.  Spread  thinly  over  the  smear  a  loopful  of  saturated  aqueous 
nigrosin  solution.  Spread  either  with  wire  loop  or  with  a  glass 
slide  as  for  blood  smears.  If  the  nigrosin  is  not  well  spread  the 
first  time  it  may  be  washed  off  with  water  and  more  nigrosin 
applied. 

4.  Dry  without  heating  and  examine  in  oil,  or  mount  in  Canada 
balsam. 

Spore  Stain  (Lagerberg's  Modified) 

1.  Make  film,  fix  by  heat,  and  cover  with  small  amount  of 
5  per  cent  chromic  acid. 

2.  After  30  seconds,  add  about  twice  as  much  concentrated 
ammonia  as  there  is  chromic  acid  on  the  slide.  Allow  to  act 
about  2  minutes. 

3.  Rinse  with  tap  water  and  steam  with  carbol  fuchsin  for  2 
or  3  minutes. 

4.  Rinse  and  destain  with  1  per  cent  sulphuric  acid  for  15  to 
30  seconds. 

5.  Rinse  again  and  flood  slide  with  the  tap  water. 

6.  Add  to  this  a  few  drops  of  Loeffler's  methylene  blue  and 
allow  to  stain  for  10  to  30  seconds. 

7.  Rinse,  blot,  dry,  and  examine. 

Nigrosin  for  Negative  Mounts 

1.  Place  a  loopful  of  culture  on  a  clean  glass  sfide,  spread,  and 
allow  it  to  air  dry. 

2.  Spread  thinly  over  the  smear  a  loopful  of  saturated  aqueous 
nigrosin  solution.  Spread  either  with  the  wire  loop  or  with  a 
glass  sHde  (as  for  blood  smears).  Dry  and  examine  in  oil,  or 
mount  in  Canada  balsam. 


METHODS  OF  STAINING  OF  BACTERIA  51 

By  the  use  of  nigrosin  it  is  possible  to  examine  organisms 
unstained.  There  are  many  points  in  favor  of  this  method,  e.g., 
the  organisms  do  not  shrink  or  change  their  form.  Nigrosin  may 
be  used  in  demonstrating  the  motihty  of  bacteria.  For  this 
purpose  add  a  very  small  amount  of  nigrosin  to  a  hanging  drop. 

Congo  Red  for  Negative  Mounts 
(For  differentiating  living  and  dead  bacteria) 

1.  Place  a  drop  of  2  per  cent  aqueous  Congo  red  solution 
(free  from  bacteria)  on  a  clean  glass  slide. 

2.  Mix  with  it  a  loopful  of  the  bacterial  culture. 

3.  Allow  it  to  dry  thoroughly  in  air  10  minutes  or  more. 

4.  Flood  with  acid  alcohol  (1  or  2  per  cent  HCl).  This 
changes  the  color  to  blue  and  fixes  the  film. 

5.  Dry  without  washing  and  examine  in  oil,  with  or  without 
cover  glass.     Living  cells  appear  unstained-white  against  blue. 

Unless  preserved  with  oil  or  balsam  the  preparations  fade 
rapidly. 

This  method  of  preparing  negative  mounts  is  recommended 
for  root-nodule  bacteria.  The  active  living  cells  are  negative 
while  the  dead  cells  are  more  or  less  positive. 

Erythrosin  for  Direct  Staining  of  Soil  Bacteria 

1.  Prepare  a  suspension  of  soil  (about  1 :  10)  in  a  0.015  per  cent 
solution  of  gelatin. 

2.  Smear  a  thin  film  on  a  slide  and  dry. 

3.  Immerse  in  40  per  cent  acetic  acid  for  1  to  3  minutes,  wash 
and  dry  on  a  water  bath. 

4.  While  on  the  water  bath,  stain  for  1  minute  with  1  per  cent 
aqueous  solution  of  erythrosin  Y  or  rose  bengal. 

Barlow  Stain  for  Root  Nodule  Bacteria 
(See  p.  109) 


PART  III 

QUALITATIVE   AND   QUANTITATIVE   METHODS   OF 

ANALYSIS 

PREPARATION  OF  REAGENTS 

Prepare  stock  solutions  of  the  indicators  in  dropping  bottles. 

Phenolphthalein. — Dissolve  1  gram  of  pure  phenolphthalein  in 
100  cubic  centimeters  of  86  per  cent  alcohol.  This  indicator 
is  recommended  for  the  titration  of  organic  and  inorganic  acids 
and  strong  bases.  It  should  not  be  used  for  the  titration  of 
ammonia. 

Methyl  Orange. — Dissolve  0.02  gram  of  solid  methyl  orange 
in  100  cubic  centimeters  of  hot  water,  allow  to  cool,  and,  if  a 
deposit  forms,  filter.  If  the  sodium  salt  is  used  instead  of  the 
acid,  take  0.022  gram  to  100  cubic  centimeters  of  water.  Add 
0.67  cubic  centimeters  of  0.1  N  hydrochloric  acid,  let  stand,  and 
filter.     Methyl  orange  is  used  for  the  titration  of  strong  acids. 

Litmus. — This  indicator  is  obtained  from  a  species  of  lichen. 
It  is  widely  used  in  bacteriology,  especially  in  milk.  The  chief 
coloring  principle  is  azolitmin.  Dissolve  5  grams  of  purified 
litmus  in  100  cubic  centimeters  of  water.  Heat  in  the  steamer 
for  1  to  2  hours,  with  occasional  shaking.  Allow  to  settle  for 
several  days  and  then  decant  the  clear  liquid. 

Cochineal. — Take  6  grams  of  cochineal  to  50  cubic  centimeters 
of  alcohol  (95  per  cent)  and  200  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled 
water.  Shake  the  cochineal  in  the  mixture  of  water  and  alcohol. 
Allow  to  stand  for  two  days  at  room  temperature.  Filter  until 
clear.  The  color  of  this  solution  should  be  a  deep  ruby  red;  in 
the  presence  of  alkali  a  violet  color,  and  in  the  presence  of  acid 
a  yellowish-red  color. 

Sodium  Alizarine  Sulfonate. — Dissolve  1  gram  in  100  cubic 
centimeters  of  distilled  water  by  warming.  Filter  and  make 
up  to  volume. 

52 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS 


53 


A  list  of  the  color  change  and  pH  range  of  some  of  the  more 
common  indicators  is  given  below. 

The  indicators  for  measuring  the  hydrogen-ion  concentration 
are  prepared  as  follows:  0.1  gram  of  the  dry  powder  is  ground  in 
a  mortar  with  varying  amounts  of  N/20  NaOH  and  diluted  to 
25  cubic  centimeters  with  water. 

N/20  NaOH 
Used,  Cubic 
0.1  Gram  of  Indicator  Centimeters 

Phenol  red 5.7 

Brom  phenol  blue 3.0 

Cresol  red 5.3 

Brom  cresol  purple 3.7 

Thymol  blue 4.3 

Brom  thymol  blue 3.2 

Methyl  red 7.4 

For  colorimetric  tests,  dilute  the  stock  solution  of  25  cubic 
centimeters  with  distilled  water  to  250  cubic  centimeters  or  a 
concentration  of  0.04  per  cent  of  the  indicator.  Take  5  drops  of 
this  dilute  solution  to  10  cubic  centimeters  of  the  liquid  to  be 
tested. 


Color  Change  and  pH  Range  of  Certain  Indicators 


Common  name 


Color  change  Range  pH 


Thymol  blue  (acid) . . . . 

Brom  phenol  blue 

Brom  cresol  green 

Methyl  red 

Brom  cresol  purple 

Chlor  phenol  red 

Brom  thymol  blue .... 

Phenol  red 

Cresol  red 

Thymol  blue  (alkaline) 

Phenolphthalein 

Methyl  orange 

Litmus 

Cochineal 

Alizarin  red 

Congo  red 


Red-yellow 

Yellow-blue 

Yellow-green 

Red-yellow 

Yellow-purple 

Yellow-red 

Yellow-blue 

Yellow-red 

Yellow-red 

Yellow-blue 

Colorless-red 

Orange  red-yellow 

Red-blue 

Yellow-lilac 

Yellow-pink 

Blue-red 


1.2  to 

3.0  to 

Oto 

.4  to 

.2  to 

.2  to 

6.0  to 

6.8to 

7.2  to 

8.0  to 

8.3  to 

3.1  to 
4.5  to 
4.8  to 
5.0  to 
3.0  to 


2.8 
4.6 
5.6 
6.0 
6.8 
6.8 
7.6 
8.4 
8.8 
9.6 
10.0 
4.4 
8.3 
6.2 
6.8 
5.0 


54  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

PREPARATION  OF  STANDARD  SOLUTIONS 

A  great  many  methods  have  been  described  for  the  standard- 
ization of  solutions.  Only  a  brief  outline  will  be  given  of  certain 
of  these  methods;  for  detailed  directions  the  reader  is  referred  to 
some  of  the  recent  textbooks  on  volumetric  analysis. 

Normal  Sulphuric  Acid  Solution 

A  normal  solution  of  sulphuric  acid  is  one-half  the  molecular 
weight  of  H2SO4  in  grams,  diluted  to  1  liter  with  distilled  water. 
Since  the  molecular  weight  of  sulphuric  acid  is  (2  +  32  +  64)  98, 
then  49  grams,  one-half  of  98,  is  the  amount  necessary  for  each  liter. 

1.  In  order  to  secure  49  grams  of  H2SO4,  it  requires  49  divided 
by  1.80  (specific  gravity  of  concentrated  sulfuric  acid),  or  27.2 
cubic  centimeters  of  chemically  pure  acid.  To  be  sure  that 
sufficient  acid  has  been  used,  measure  out  about  27.5  cubic 
centimeters  of  acid. 

2.  Place  the  acid  in  a  1,000-cubic  centimeter  Erlenmeyer  flask, 
containing  about  500  cc.  of  water,  mix  well  and  transfer  to  a 
volumetric  flask;  make  up  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters  with  water 
and  mix  carefully. 

3.  From  this  mixture  remove  10-cubic  centimeter  portions, 
accurately  measured  in  a  10-cubic  centimeter  pipette,  and 
place  in  weighing  bottles  which  have  been  thoroughly  cleaned, 
dried  in  an  oven,  cooled,  and  weighed. 

4.  One  cubic  centimeter  of  chemically  pure  ammonia  is  added 
to  each  weighing  bottle  to  neutralize  the  sulphuric  acid. 

5.  The  water  and  excess  of  ammonia  is  then  evaporated  in  an 
oven  at  100°C.  and  the  ammonium  sulphate  remains  behind. 
If  the  chemicals  are  pure,  100  cubic  centimeters  of  the  solution 
should  give  49  grams  of  sulphuric  acid.  In  10  cubic  centimeters 
of  the  solution  there  should  be  0.49  gram  of  H2SO4. 

H2S04:(NH4)2S04::98:132 
49        :         X         ::98:132 
X  =0:66 

If  the  solution  is  exactly  normal,  there  should  be  0.6600  gram  of 
(NH4)2S04  formed  from  10  cubic  centimeters.  In  case  the 
amount  of  (NH4)2S04  formed  is  too  great,  its  factor  is  determined 
by  dividing  0.6600  into  the  weight  of  ammonium  sulphate  found. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  55 

If,  for  instance,  the  weight  of  ammonium  sulphate  is  0.6675,  the 
factor  of  the  solution  is  1.01 13  +  .  This  means  that  10  cubic 
centimeters  of  the  solution  is  equivalent  to  10.113  cubic  centi- 
meters of  normal  solution. 

Normal  Sodium  Hydroxide  Solution 

To  prepare  a  normal  solution  of  sodium  hydroxide,  weigh  out 
roughly  45  grams  of  caustic  soda  (wash  off  the  carbonate  from 
the  surface  of  the  sticks  of  alkali)  and  dissolve  in  a  little  more 
than  a  liter  of  water.  Allow  this  solution  to  stand  until  cool 
and  titrate  against  A^/5  acid  potassium  phthalate.  The  prepa- 
ration of  N/5  phthalate  follows : 

Molecular  weight  of  KHC8H4O4  =  204.14. 

Normal  phthalate  =  204.14  grams  in  1,000.0  cubic  centimeters 
of  water. 

Fifth  normal  phthalate  =  40.83  grams  in  1,000.0  cubic 
centimeters  of  water. 

Weigh  out  20.414  grams  of  dried  (at  110  to  115°C.)  phthalate. 
Transfer  to  a  500-cubic  centimeter  flask.  Dissolve  in  water 
and  make  up  to  volume. 

To  standardize  a  normal  solution  of  NaOH,  measure  50  cubic 
centimeters  of  the  N/5  phthalate  solution  with  a  pipette  and 
titrate  with  phenolphthalein  as  the  indicator;  50  cubic  centi- 
meters  A^/5  phthalate  =  10  cubic  centimeters  of  N/1  NaOH. 

Example. — 50  cubic  centimeters  N/5  phthalate  =  9.36  cubic  centimeters 
of  the  approximately  N/1  NaOH.  ^ 

^  =  1.068  factor  for  iV/1  NaOH. 

Make  necessary  dilution  if  an  exact  N/1  solution  is  desired. 

To  standardize  an  N/10  NaOH  solution,  dilute  20  cubic  centimeters  of 
phthalate  solution  to  100  cubic  centimeters  and  titrate  25  cubic  centimeter 
aliquots  with  the  alkali.  Calculate  the  factor  as  above  or  dilute  if  an  exact 
N/10  solution  is  desired. 

Standard  (iV/6)  Solution  of  Oxalic  Acid 

To  prepare  a  standard,  iV/6  solution  of  oxalic  acid,  dissolve 
63  grams  of  C.P.  oxalic  acid  [(COOH)2-2H20]  in  1  liter  of  dis- 
tilled water  by  warming.  Then  dilute  to  exactly  6  liters  with 
distilled  water.     This  solution  is  standardized  against  the  sodium 


56  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

hydroxide  solution,  using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator. 
One  cubic  centimeter  of  this  solution  is  equivalent  to  exactly  1 
milligram  of  carbon  in  carbon  dioxide  determinations. 

Standard  (A^/6)  Barium  Hydroxide  Solution 

To  prepare  one  liter  of  a  A^/6  barium  hydroxide  solution, 
14.28  grams  of  anhydrous  barium  hydroxide  is  theoretically 
required.  However,  in  the  process  of  preparation  of  the  solution, 
considerable  barium  carbonate  is  formed.  Hence  about  one- 
fourth  to  one-sixth  more  of  the  hydroxide  is  taken  than  is 
required  theoretically.  Add  100  grams  of  C.P.  anhydrous 
barium  hydroxide  to  6  liters  of  distilled  water.  Allow  to  dissolve 
for  24  hours  with  occasional  shaking.  The  residue  is  allowed  to 
settle  for  7  days,  when  the  supernatant  solution  is  filtered  through 
a  double  layer  of  filter  paper.  The  solution  is  standardized  to 
exactly  iV/6  against  the  oxaHc  acid,  using  phenolphthalein  as  an 
indicator. 

QUALITATIVE   METHODS   FOR  THE  DETERMINATION  OF  VARI- 
OUS FORMS  OF  INORGANIC  NITROGEN 

Nessler's  Reagent  for  Ammonia 

1.  Dissolve  50  grams  of  potassium  iodide  in  a  small  quantity 
of  cold  distilled  water.     (Ammonia,  free;  about  35  c.c.) 

2.  Add  a  saturated  solution  of  mercuric  chloride  until  a  slight 
precipitate  persists. 

3.  Now  add  400  cubic  centimeters  of  a  50  per  cent  solution  of 
potassium  hydroxide  made  by  dissolving  the  potassium  hydroxide 
and  allowing  it  to  clarify  by  sedimentation  before  using. 

4.  Dilute  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters,  allow  to  settle  for  1 
week,  and  decant.  This  solution  gives  the  required  color  with 
ammonia  within  5  minutes  after  addition. 

5.  Keep  the  Nessler's  solution  in  a  well-stoppered  bottle 
away  from  the  light. 

Test  for  Ammonia. — Add  to  a  drop  of  Nessler's  solution  in  a 
test  plate  a  loopful  of  the  solution  to  be  tested.  A  deep  golden- 
yellow  color  indicates  the  presence  of  ammonia. 

The  presence  of  glucose  in  solution  interferes  with  the  ammonia 
test.  In  that  case,  the  ammonia  should  be  removed  first  by 
aeration  and  then  tested  (see  p.  63). 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  57 

Thomas'  Reagent  for  Ammonia 

Prepare  a  5  per  cent  solution  of  phenol  and  a  sodium  hypochlo- 
rite solution  containing  1  per  cent  available  chlorine:  1  cubic 
centimeter  of  the  NaOCl  solution  will  neutraHze  2.86  cubic 
centimeters  of  O.IN  sodium  thiosulphate. 

Dilute  the  culture,  0.2  to  1.0  cubic  centimeter  with  8  cubic 
centimeters  of  water  and  add  1  cubic  centimeter  of  phenol  and 
1  cubic  centimeter  of  hypochlorite.  Let  stand  for  J^  hour.  A 
blue  color  indicates  ammonia  or  amines. 

Trommsdorf's  Reagent  for  Nitrites 

1.  Add  slowly,  with  constant  stirring,  a  boiling  solution  of  20 
grams  of  zinc  chloride  in  100  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled  water 
to  a  mixture  of  4  grams  of  starch  in  water.  Continue  heating 
until  the  starch  is  dissolved  as  much  as  possible,  and  the  solution 
is  nearly  clear. 

2.  Then   dilute   with  water  and   add   2  grams   zinc  iodide. 

3.  Dilute  to  1  Hter  and  filter. 

4.  Store  in  well-stoppered  bottles  in  the  dark. 

Test  for  Nitrites. — Place  3  drops  of  Trommsdorf's  reagent 
in  depression  on  test  plate.  Add  1  drop  of  dilute  sulphuric  acid 
(1:3).  Remove  a  loopful  of  the  solution  to  be  tested  and  touch 
to  surface  of  reagent.  A  blue  color  indicates  the  presence  of 
nitrites. 

Reagents  for  Nitrate,  Nitrite,  and  Hydroxylamine 

(a)  Dissolve  10.5  grams  sulfanilic  acid  and  6.8  grams  sodium 
acetate  in  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  30  per  cent  (by  volume) 
acetic  acid,  by  heating  on  water  bath.  Boil  for  3  minutes  and 
make  up  to  1,000  cc. 

(b)  Boil  5  grams  a-naphthylamine  in  700  cubic  centimeters  of 
water  for  5  minutes,  then  filter  and  add  5  cc.  of  concentrated 
HCl,  cool  and  make  up  to  1,000  cc. 

Solutions  (a)  and  (h)  are  always  kept  separate. 

(c)  Dissolve  1.3  grams  iodine  in  100  cubic  centimeters  of  glacial 
acetic  acid. 

{d)  Dissolve  2.5  grams  Na2S203-5H20  in  100  cubic  centi- 
meters of  water. 


58  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

(e)  Zinc  dust  is  freed  from  traces  of  nitrates  and  nitrites 
by  treating  some  of  the  pure  commercial  zinc  dust  with  a 
dilute  solution  of  acetic  acid  and  heating  on  a  water  bath  for 
1  hour. 

The  zinc  is  filtered  off  by  means  of  suction,  washed  with  dis- 
tilled water  and  dried. 

Test  for  Nitrites. — Place  10  to  15  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
solution  to  be  tested  into  a  test  tube  and  add  1  to  2  cubic  centi- 
meter portions  of  solution  (a)  first,  then  an  equal  amount  of 
solution  (b).  The  formation  of  a  red  color  in  solution  indicates 
the  presence  of  nitrites.  This  test  is  sensitive  to  1  X  10~^  milli- 
gram of  N02~  ions  in  1  liter  of  solution.  If  the  solution,  which 
is  to  be  tested  for  the  presence  of  nitrite,  contains  free  inorganic 
acids,  it  must  be  first  neutraHzed  with  a  solution  of  a  base.  The 
same  is  true  of  the  following  three  methods. 

Test  for  Nitrates,  in  the  Absence  of  Nitrites. — This  test  is 
based  upon  the  reduction  of  nitrates  to  nitrites  by  zinc  dust. 

Place  10  to  15  cubic  centimeters  of  the  solution  to  be  tested  in  a 
test  tube  and  add  1  to  2  cubic  centimeter  portions  of  reagents 
(a)  and  (h)  as  in  the  test  for  nitrites.  Add  also  a  very  small 
pinch  (about  10  to  20  milligrams)  of  zinc  dust  (e).  The  produc- 
tion of  a  red  color  indicates  the  presence  of  nitrates.  Sensitivity 
of  test,  1  milligram  NOs"  ions  in  1  liter  of  solution. 

Test  for  Hydroxylamine  in  the  Absence  of  Nitrites. — This 
test  is  based  upon  the  oxidation  of  hydroxylamine  (NH2OH)  to 
nitrites  by  iodine. 

Place  10  to  15  cubic  centimeters  of  the  solution  into  a  test 
tube.  Add  3  to  5  cubic  centimeters  of  solution  (a)  and  about  5 
drops  of  solution  (c).  Shake  and  allow  to  stand  2  to  3  minutes 
in  the  cold.  Add  solution  (d),  drop  by  drop,  until  the  iodine 
is  just  decolorized.  Now  add  2  to  3  cubic  centimeters  of  solu- 
tion (h).  The  formation  of  a  red  color  indicates  the  presence  of 
hydroxylamine  in  the  test  solution. 

Sensitivity  of  test,  3  X  10-^  milligram  of  NH2OH  in  1  liter. 

Test  for  Nitrates  and  Hydroxylamine  in  the  Presence  of 
Nitrites.^ — The  destruction  of  nitrites  is  first  brought  about  by  a 
diazo-reaction,  which  consists  in  adding  the  sulfanihc  acid  reagent 
(a)  to  the  test  solution  and  boiling. 

1  Blom,  J.,  Ber.  deut.  chem.  Gesell,  59 :  121,  1926. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  59 

Place  10  to  15  cubic  centimeters  of  the  test  solution  in  a  test 
tube.  Add  5  cubic  centimeters  of  reagent  (a).  Boil  over  free 
flame  or  heat  on  water  bath  for  4  to  5  minutes.  To  prove  that 
all  nitrites  have  been  destroyed,  add  to  3  cubic  centimeters  of 
the  mixture  a  few  drops  of  reagents  (a)  and  (b).  The  lack  of 
formation  of  a  red  color  indicates  the  destruction  of  all  the 
nitrites. 

The  remaining  solution  containing  the  reagent  (a)  is  cooled 
down  and  used  for  the  nitrate  or  hydroxylamine  tests. 

DiPHENYLAMINE  ReAGENT^ 

1.  Dissolve  0.7  gram  of  diphenylamine  in  a  mixture  of  60  cubic 
centimeters  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  and  28.8  cubic  centi- 
meters of  distilled  water. 

2.  Cool  this  mixture  and  add  slowly  11.3  cubic  centimeters  of 
concentrated  hydrochloric  acid  (specific  gravity  1.19).  After 
standing  overnight  some  of  the  base  separates,  showing  that  the 
reagent  is  saturated. 

Test  for  Nitrates. — Place  1  drop  of  the  substance  to  be  tested 
in  a  depression  on  the  test  plate.  Add  1  drop  of  diphenylamine 
solution  and  allow  the  solutions  to  mix  thoroughly.  Then  add 
2  drops  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid.  A  deep-blue  color 
indicates  nitrates.  This  test  cannot  be  made  in  the  presence  of 
nitrites,  chloric  and  selenic  acids,  ferric  chloride,  and  many  other 
oxidizing  agents.  Diphenylbenzidine  is  recommended  as  prefer- 
able to  diphenylamine. 2 

Brucine  Reagent 

Dissolve  1.0  gram  of  brucine  in  10  cubic  centimeters  of  50  per 
cent  pure  sulphuric  acid  and  make  up  to  100  cubic  centimeters 
with  distilled  water. 

Test  for  Nitrates. — Place  1  drop  of  the  substance  to  be  tested 
in  a  depression  on  the  test  plate  and  add  3  drops  of  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid.  Now  add  1  drop  of  brucine  solution.  If  nitrates 
are  present,  a  red  color  develops  quickly,  which  changes  to  orange, 

1  Withers  and  Ray,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  33,  708-711,  1911. 

2Snell,  F.  D.,  "  Colorimetric  Analysis,"  D.  Van  Nostrand  Co.,  1921. 


60  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

then  slowly  to  lemon  or  yellow,  and  finally  becomes  a  greenish- 
yellow. 

This  test  can  be  used  for  quantitative  determination  of 
nitrates.  The  test  is  based  upon  the  final  sulphur  yellow  color 
rather  than  upon  the  initial  red  coloration.  If  the  solution  con- 
tains much  organic  matter  or  ferrous  iron,  these  should  be 
oxidized  by  a  permanganate  solution.  The  nitrous  acid  is 
thereby  also  oxidized  to  nitric  acid  and  if  nitrous  acid  is  deter- 
mined separately,  the  results  should  be  subtracted  from  those 
of  the  nitric  acid. 

The  determinations  are  made  by  adding  1  cubic  centimeter  of 
the  concentrated  solution  of  brucine  and  30  cubic  centimeters  of 
concentrated  sulphuric  acid  to  20  cubic  centimeters  of  the  solu- 
tion of  the  unknown.  In  adding  the  sulphuric  acid,  care  should 
be  taken  to  prevent  boiling. 

The  nitrate  is  determined  in  a  colorimeter,  using  for  comparison 
a  standard  solution  containing  0.1872  gram  KNO3  in  1  liter  of 
water.  This  standard  gives  0.0001  gram  N2O5  or  0.00002594 
gram  nitrate  nitrogen  per  1  cubic  centimeter  of  solution.  A 
duplicate  blank  should  always  be  made. 

Phenoldisulphonic  Acid^ 

Dissolve  25  grams  of  pure  white  phenol  crystals  in  150  cubic 
centimeters  of  pure  concentrated  sulphuric  acid,  add  75  cubic 
centimeters  of  fuming  sulphuric  acid  (13  per  cent  SO3),  stir  well, 
and  heat  for  2  hours  at  about  100°C.  The  reagent  prepared  in 
this  way  should  not  contain  any  mono-acids  or  any  tri-acids. 
Two  cubic  centimeters  of  this  reagent  give  reliable  results  with 
not  more  than  5  milligrams  of  nitrate  nitrogen. 

Since  in  strongly  acid  solutions  the  following  reaction  takes 
place,  especially  by  heating, 

3HNO2  =  HNO3  +  2N0  +  H2O, 

a  positive  test  for  nitrate  will  be  obtained,  by  the  phenoldi- 
sulfonic  acid  and  brucine  methods,  in  solutions  containing  only 
nitrite. 

'  Chamot,  Pratt,  and  Redfield,  /.  Am.  Chem.  Soc,  33,  381-384,  1911. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  61 

Test  for  Indol : 

Prepare  test  solutions : 

(a)  Paradimethylaminobenzaldehyde 1.0  gm. 

Absolute  alcohol 95 . 0  cc. 

Hydrochloric  acid  (specific  gravity  1.2) 20.0  cc. 

(6)   Potassium  persulphate 1.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 100 . 0  cc. 

Place  a  few  drops  of  solutions  (a)  and  (h)  on  a  piece  of  absorbent 
cotton.  Push  the  cotton  into  the  test  tube  until  the  moistened 
surface  is  within  about  1  inch  of  the  culture  liquid.  Now  place 
the  tube  in  boiling  water  for  5  to  10  minutes.  If  indol  is  present, 
a  red  color  will  appear  on  the  bottom  of  the  cotton  plug. 

DETERMINATION  OF  MOISTURE  IN  SOIL 

Weigh  from  5  to  10  grams  of  soil  into  a  glass  or  aluminum 
dish  and  dry  at  100  to  105°C.  until  there  is  no  further  change  in 
weight.  About  6  to  12  hours  are  generally  sufficient.  Cool  in  a 
desiccator  and  weigh.  Determine  all  percentages  of  moisture  on 
the  dry  basis. 

MOISTURE-HOLDING  CAPACITY  OF  SOIL 

To  determine  the  amount  of  moisture  which  is  required  to 
saturate  the  particular  soil,  the  following  procedure  is  used: 
Round  copper  cups,  about  4  to  5  centimeters  in  diameter  and 
about  2  centimeters  high,  with  a  perforated  copper  bottom  are 
used.  Pieces  of  filter  paper  are  cut  to  fit  exactly  upon  the  bottom 
of  the  cups;  the  paper  is  moistened  and  the  cups  with  the  moist- 
ened paper  weighed.  The  cups  are  then  filled  with  the  soil  in 
question  and  the  surface  is  leveled  off  carefully  with  the  edge  of 
the  cup.  The  cups  are  then  weighed  again.  The  cups  with  soil 
are  now  placed  in  a  dish  with  water,  the  water  reaching  out- 
side of  the  cup  to  about  half  its  height.  After  24  hours  the 
soil  has  become  saturated  with  water;  the  cups  are  removed  and 
the  surface  carefully  dried  with  a  cloth  to  remove  water  adhering 
to  outside  of  cup,  and  weighed  again.  The  cups  are  then  placed 
in  a  drying  oven  for  24  hours,  at  105°C.,  until  they  come  to 
constant  weight.  The  soil  is  now  carefully  and  completely 
removed  from  the  cup  and  from  paper,  and  these  weighed  again, 
giving  weight   of  cup   and   dry   paper.     The   moisture-holding 


62  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

capacity  of  the  soil  as  well  as  the  moisture  content  of  the  par- 
ticular soil  can  be  calculated  from  these  data. 

QUANTITATIVE  METHODS  FOR  AMMONIA  DETERMINATION 
1.  Direct  Distillation : 

Sulphuric  acid  solution N/14 

Sodium  hydroxide  solution N/14 

Methyl-red. 

Magnesium  oxide. 

1.  Transfer  the  culture  to  be  analyzed  to  an  800-cubic  centi- 
meter Kjeldahl  or  a  copper  flask,  using  about  200  cubic  centi- 
meters of  distilled  water. 

2.  Add  5  grams  of  magnesium  oxide  and  some  shavings  of 
paraffin  to  prevent  foaming. 

3.  Connect  to  a  condenser,  the  lower  end  of  which  is  in  iV/14 
acid  contained  in  an  Erlenmeyer  flask. 

The  period  of  distillation  will  vary  with  the  amount  of  ammonia 
present.  As  a  rule,  1  hour  is  long  enough  to  drive  off  all  ammonia 
nitrogen. 

4.  If  methyl-red  is  used  as  an  indicator,  the  distillate  should  be 
boiled  for  a  few  minutes,  cooled  to  15  or  20°C.,  about  5  drops  of 
methyl-red  added,  and  the  solution  titrated. 

5.  The  distillate  is  titrated  with  standard  alkali,  and  from  the 
number  of  cubic  centimeters  of  standard  acid  neutralized  by 
the  distillate  the  weight  of  nitrogen  liberated  as  ammonia  is 
calculated. 

2.  Nesslerization. — Ammonia-free  water  should  be  prepared 
by  adding  sodium  hydroxide  and  potassium  permanganate  to 
laboratory  water  and  redistilling.  Discard  the  first  portion  of 
the  distillate.  After  about  one-fourth  of  the  water  has  been 
evaporated,  the  subsequent  distillate  will  be  free  of  ammonia. 

Standard  Ammonium  Chloride  Solution. — Dissolve  3.82  grams 
of  ammonium  chloride  in  1,000  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled 
water;  dilute  10  cubic  centimeters  of  this  to  1,000  cubic  centi- 
meters with  ammonia-free  water.  One  cubic  centimeter  of  this 
solution  contains  0.01  milligram  of  nitrogen. 

1.  Prepare  a  series  of  16  Nessler's  tubes  which  contain  the 
following  number  of  cubic  centimeters  of  the  standard  ammonium 
chloride    solution,    and    dilute    to    50    cubic    centimeters    with 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  63 

ammonia-free  water,  namely:  0.0,  0.1,  0.3,  0.5,  0.7,  1.0,  1.4,  1.7, 
2.0,  2.5,  3.0,  3.5,  4.0,  4.5,  5.0,  and  6.0. 

2.  These  will  contain  0.01  milligram  of  ammonia  nitrogen  for 
each  cubic  centimeter  of  the  standard  solution  used. 

3.  Nesslerize  the  standards  and  also  the  distillates  by  adding 
approximately  2  cubic  centimeters  of  Nessler's  reagent  to  each 
tube. 

4.  Do  not  stir  the  contents  of  the  tubes. 

5.  After  Nesslerizing,  allow  the  tubes  to  stand  for  10  minutes. 

6.  Compare  the  color  produced  in  these  tubes  with  that  in 
the  standards  by  looking  vertically  downward  through  them  at 
a  white  surface  placed  at  an  angle  in  front  of  a  window,  so  as  to 
reflect  the  light  upward. 

3.  Aeration  Method.' — Place  in  a  Kjeldahl  flask  100  grams  of 
soil  to  be  analyzed,  4  grams  of  sodium  carbonate,  0.5  cubic 
centimeter  paraffin  oil,  and  about  300  cubic  centimeters  of 
ammonia-free  water.  Apply  suction,  bubbling  the  air  first 
through  weak  (10  per  cent)  sulphuric  acid  solution,  to  remove 
any  ammonia  that  might  be  present  in  the  air;  the  air  is  bubbled 
through  the  solution  containing  the  soil  and  then  is  bubbled 
through  a  bottle  or  long  tube  containing  standard  sulphuric  acid 
0.2N,  O.IN,  or  0.05N  depending  on  the  amount  of  ammonia 
present),  where  the  ammonia  is  absorbed.  The  flasks  containing 
the  soil  are  placed  in  a  water  bath,  the  temperature  of  which  is 
maintained  at  75  to  80°C.  Aeration  is  continued  for  2  to  3 
hours.  In  the  case  of  liquid  cultures,  30  to  50  cubic  centimeter 
portions  of  the  culture  solution  are  placed  in  Folin  aeration  tubes, 
5  cubic  centimeters  of  20  per  cent  sodium  carbonate  solution, 
1  gram  NaCl  and  0.5  cubic  centimeter  petroleum  oil  are  added 
to  each  and  aeration  continued  for  3  hours,  tubes  being  placed  in 
thermostat  at  60  to  65°C. 

QUANTITATIVE  (COLORIMETRIC)   METHOD  FOR  DETERMINING 

NITRATES 

Evaporate  to  dryness  in  a  porcelain  dish  on  a  water  bath  a 
convenient  quantity  of  unknown  nitrate  solution,  depending 
upon  the  amount  of  nitrate  present. 

1  GiBBS,  W.  M.,  et  at,  Soil  Sci.,  15 :  261-267,  1923. 


64  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

This  solution  should  be  alkaline.  In  the  case  of  soil  extracts 
which  had  been  treated  with  CaO  in  filtration  no  further  treat- 
ment is  necessary.  In  other  cases,  the  solution  should  be  treated 
with  NaOH  or  limewater  to  render  slightly  alkaline  before 
evaporation. 

When  evaporated,  add  2  cubic  centimeters  of  phenoldisulphonic 
acid  and  stir  with  the  rounded  end  of  a  glass  rod  for  about  10 
minutes  so  as  to  loosen  the  residue. 

Note. — Equations  for  the  action  of  phenoldisulphonic  acid  on  a 
nitrate : 

H2SO4  +  2KNO3  =  2HNO3  +  K,S04. 

C6H3(OH)(S03H)2  +  HNO3  =  C6H2(OH)(S03H)2(N02)  +  H2O. 
C6H2(OH)(S03H)2(N02)     +    3NH4OH     = 

C6H2(ONH4)(S020NH4)2N02  +  3H2O. 

Dilute  with  water  and  add  ammonia  solution  (strong  ammo- 
nium hydroxide  diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of  water)  until 
alkaline;  a  yellow  color  is  formed.  This  is  then  diluted  to  a 
known  volume  and  compared  with  the  standard. 

Example. — Take  500  cubic  centimeters  of  water  to  100  grams  of  soil,  and 
in  order  to  clarify  add  about  2  grams  of  calcium  oxide.     To  secure  a  fair 
sample,  mix  by  rubbing  in  a  mortar  or  by  shaking  in  a  wide-mouthed  bottle. 
Filter  through  folded  filter  paper  until  clear.     Take  a  convenient  volume, 
for   example,    25   cubic   centimeters,    and   determine   the   nitrate   present. 
This  is  equal  to  5  grams  of  soil.     Use  the  colorimeter  to  compare  the 
standard  solution  with  the  unknown. 
Formula  for  calculating  results: 
^       100    *S    ,   K    ,, 
^=W-A^'U-^ 
Where  X  =  Number  of  milligrams  of  N  as  NO3  per  100  grams  dry  soil. 
W  =  Weight  of  dry  soil. 

S  =  Cubic  centimeters  of  water  added  to  W. 
A  =  Aliquot  taken  for  evaporation. 

d  =  Number  of  cubic  centimeters  to  which  A  was  diluted. 
K  =  Reading  on  scale  of  standard  solution. 
U  =  Reading  on  scale  of  unknown  solution. 

M  =  Milligrams  of  N  as  NO3  in  1  cubic  centimeter  of  standard 
solution  as  diluted  for  reading. 

Standard  Nitrate  Solution. — Dissolve  0.722  gram  of  pure  dry 
potassium  nitrate  in  1,000  cubic .  centimeters  of  water.  Of  this 
strong  solution  dilute  10  to  100  cubic  centimeters,  and  from  this 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  65 

take  10  cubic  centimeters  for  a  standard.  Evaporate  to  dryness 
in  a  porcelain  dish  on  a  water  bath  and  treat  as  described  on  p. 
64.  Make  up  volume  to  100  cubic  centimeters.  This  standard 
is  equal  to  0,1  milligram  of  nitrogen  as  nitrate. 

Determination  of  Nitrates  by  the  Reduction  Method 

Prepare  an  aqueous  extract  of  the  soil,  peat  or  decomposing 
organic  matter  which  is  to  be  analyzed.  Extract  50  or  100 
grams  of  the  material  three  to  six  times  with  water  and  filter 
through  a  folded  paper,  so  as  to  collect  250  cubic  centimeters  of 
solution.  This  solution  is  collected  into  a  500-cubic  centimeter 
Kjeldahl  flask. 

Add  5  cubic  centimeters  of  a  50  per  cent  solution  of  sodium 
hydroxide  and  distill  over  an  open  flame,  until  about  100  to  150 
cubic  centimeters  have  been  driven  over. 

Replace  the  water  driven  off  in  heating. 

When  cool,  add  2  grams  of  finely  divided  Devarda's  alloy 
(about  60-mesh)  and  connect  flask  again  with  distilling  apparatus. 

Boil  carefully  for  30  to  60  minutes  and  collect  the  distillate  in 
a  definite  volume  of  standard  acid  solution. 

Titrate  the  solution  with  standard  alkali  and  calculate  the 
nitrate-nitrogen  distilled  over  as  ammonia. 

By  this  method  one  can  determine  both  ammonia  and  nitrate 
in  soil,  in  peat,  in  manure,  or  in  other  organic  composts.  For 
this  purpose  the  original  extract  is  made  with  4  per  cent  KCl 
solution  instead  of  water.  The  first  distillate  will  give  the 
ammonia  present  (collected  in  standard  acid  solution)  and  the 
second  distillate  the  nitrate. 

QUANTITATIVE    METHODS    FOR    DETERMINATION    OF    TOTAL 

NITROGEN 

Sulphuric  acid A''/14 

Sodium  hydroxide ^ A^/14 

Sulphuric  acid  (concentrated) 

Potassium  or  sodium  sulphate 

Mercuric  oxide  or  metallic  mercury 

Copper  sulphate 

Pumice  powder  or  zinc  powder  free  of  nitrogen 

Sodium  hydroxide  (40  per  cent) 

Place  a  10-gram  sample  of  soil  in  a  dry  Kjeldahl  flask  of  800- 
cubic  centimeters  capacity. 


66  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Add  0.7  gram  of  mercuric  oxide,  0.1  to  0.3  grams  of  crystalline 
copper  sulphate,  and  10  grams  of  anhydrous  sodium  sulphate  or 
powdered  potassium  sulphate. 

Add  30  to  35  cubic  centimeters  of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid. 
Thoroughly  moisten  the  whole  sample  with  acid  before  beginning 
to  heat. 

Place  the  flask  on  the  digestion  shelf  and  heat  slowly  until 
frothing  ceases.  Avoid  a  very  high  flame;  do  not  aUow  the  flame 
to  touch  the  flask  above  the  part  occupied  by  the  liquid. 

Now  raise  the  heat  (avoid  a  very  hot  flame)  until  the  acid  boils 
rapidly. 

Digest  for  some  hours  after  the  liquid  clears — until  the  cool 
liquid  is  no  longer  yellow  but  blue-white  in  color. 

In  case  the  contents  of  the  flask  are  likely  to  become  solid 
before  digestion  is  complete,  cool,  and  add  10  cubic  centimeters 
more  of  sulphuric  acid. 

When  digestion  is  complete,  cool,  and  add  about  300  cubic 
centimeters  of  water.  Shake  until  the  mixture  is  thoroughly  in 
solution.  Be  sure  that  none  of  the  digested  material  remains 
caked  to  the  sides  of  the  Kjeldahl  flask. 

Recool,  add  a  teaspoonful  of  powdered  pumice  or  a  small 
amount  of  zinc  powder  (0.5  gram)  to  prevent  bumping. 

Add  25  cubic  centimeters  of  an  8  per  cent  sodium  thiosulphate 
solution  in  order  to  precipitate  the  mercury. 

Add  80  to  100  cubic  centimeters  of  the  concentrated  sodium 
hydroxide.  (The  stock  solution  of  alkali  should  be  prepared  2 
days  or  more  before  it  is  to  be  used  in  order  that  the  sodium  car- 
bonate may  precipitate  out.  Avoid  the  deposit  in  the  bottom  of 
the  alkali.)  Enough  alkali  should  be  added  to  the  acid  digest  to 
make  the  solution  react  strongly  alkaline.  A  few  strips  of  litmus 
paper  may  be  added  in  order  to  test  the  reaction.  The  alkali 
should  be  poured  slowly  down  the  sides  of  the  flask,  connected 
at  once  to  the  condenser,  and  shaken. 

See  that  the  rubber  stopper  flts  snugly  in  the  flask.  Now  mix 
the  contents  thoroughly  by  shaking. 

Just  before  connecting  the  flask  have  a  very  low  flame  burning 
on  the  distillation  shelf.  After  the  alkaU  and  acid  mixture  are 
well  mixed,  raise  the  flame. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  67 

The  proper  amount  of  standard  acid  should  be  measured 
into  flasks  connected  to  the  distillation  shelf  prior  to  adding 
the  alkali. 

Distill  slowly.  After  the  first  15  minutes  the  flame  may  be 
raised,  but  never  so  high  that  the  distillate  collects  in  the  con- 
densing bulbs.  Generally  the  first  two-thirds  of  the  original 
volume  recovered  as  distillate  will  contain  all  the  ammonia. 

The  distillate  is  now  titrated  with  standard  alkali,  using 
methyl-red  or  any  other  convenient  indicator.  From  the  cubic 
centimeters  of  standard  acid  neutralized  by  the  distillate  the 
weight  of  nitrogen  liberated  as  ammonia  is  calculated. 

Methyl-red  Indicator. — Dissolve  1  gram  of  methyl  red  in  50 
cubic  centimeters  of  95  per  cent  alcohol  and  dilute  to  100  cubic 
centimeters  with  water.     Filter  if  the  solution  is  turbid. 

The  percentage  of  nitrogen  should  be  reported  on  the  dry  basis 
of  the  soil. 

A.  Quantitative   Methods   for    Determination   of    Total 
Nitrogen  Including  Nitrates 

Follow  the  same  method  as  described  under  Quantitative 
Methods  for  Total  Nitrogen  Determination,  except  for  the  use  of 
salicylic  acid  and  sodium  thiosulphate  during  digestion. 

Add  to  the  substance  to  be  analyzed  in  a  Kjeldahl  flask,  10 
cubic  centimeters  of  sulphuric  acid  with  salicylic  acid  (1  gram  in 
30  cubic  centimeters  of  sulphuric  acid) ;  shake  until  thoroughly 
mixed  and  allow  to  stand  5  or  10  minutes,  with  frequent  shaking. 

Now  add  10  grams  of  sodium  thiosulphate  and  heat  the  solu- 
tion gently  for  5  minutes,  then  bring  to  boiling  for  5  minutes; 
cool;  add  0.5  gram  of  copper  sulphate  and  mercuric  oxide  and 
boil.  This  reduces  the  danger  of  foaming.  Heat  gently  until 
SO3  fumes  begin  to  come  off.  Cool.  Add  15  cubic  centimeters  of 
the  salicylic — sulphuric  acid  reagent,  making  in  all  25  cubic  centi- 
meters of  acid  in  each  flask. 

Heat  very  gently  until  foaming  ceases,  then  heat  strongly  until 
colorless.  Continue  boiling  for  2  hours  after  substance  is  color- 
less.    The  entire  process  requires  5  to  6  hours. 

Follow  the  directions  as  given  in  Quantitative  Methods  for 
Total  Nitrogen  Determination. 


68 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


B.  Total  Nitrogen  Including  Nitrates  in  Aqueous  Solu- 
tions (Davisson-Parsons  Method)  1 

In  addition  to  the  usual  apparatus  for  Kjeldahl  analysis,  pre- 
pare absorbing  towers  as  shown  in  Fig.  2.  Place  35  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sulphuric  acid  in  each  glass  bead  tower  (concentrated 
H2SO4  4  parts  and  water  1  part). 

Take  100  cubic  centimeters  of  the  liquid  to  be  analyzed,  e.g., 
soil  extract  (if  rich  in  nitrogen  a  suitable 
aliquot  may  be  used).  Place  the  100 
cubic  centimeters  in  an  800-cubic  centi- 
meter Kjeldahl  flask  and  add  sufficient 
strong  sodium  hydroxide  to  make  the 
solution  approximately  0.1  N  NaOH. 
Now  add  4  drops  of  paraffin  oil  and 
one  gram  of  Devarda's  alloy  (60-mesh, 
made  free  of  ammonia  by  heating  to 
about  200°C.  for  30  minutes)  and  im- 
mediately connect  to  the  glass  bead 
tower.  Heat  with  a  rose  top  burner 
(high  flame)  until  boiling,  boil  gently 
for  20  minutes  (during  this  time  the  acid 
in  the  tower  should  about  reach  the 
boiling  temperature).  Remove  the 
flame,  allow  the  acid  to  suck  back  into 
the  flask,  and  again  bring  the  solution 
in  Kjeldahl  flask  to  the  boiling  tempera- 
ture. Boil  for  a  few  minutes.  Wash 
the  tower  with  small  quantities  of  dis- 
tilled water  and  allow  the  water  to  suck 
back  into  the  flask.  About  four  wash- 
ings of  25  cubic  centimeters  each  will 
be  found  sufficient  to  remove  all  of  the 
ammonia  from  the  tower.  Place  on  Kjeldahl  digestion  shelf  and 
heat  with  a  low  flame  until  the  organic  matter  begins  to  char. 
Now  add  5  grams  of  potassium  sulphate  and  continue  digestion 

1  Davisson,  B.  S.  and  J.  T.  Parsons,  /.  Ind.  Eng.  Chetn.,  11:  306-311, 
1919.  Jacob,  K.  D.  and  W.  J.  Geldard,  /.  hid.  Eng.  Chem.,  14:  1045- 
1047,  1922. 


S 

Fig.  2. — Apparatus  for 
measuring  total  nitrogen  in 
the  presence  of  nitrates. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  69 

for  about  2  hours  after  the  liquid  becomes  clear.  When  com- 
pleted, cool,  add  water,  pumice  stone,  and  strong  alkali  carrying 
potassium  or  sodium  sulfide  (0.4  per  cent)  and  distill  as  in  the 
official  Kjeldahl  method. 

DETERMINATION  OF  AMINO  NITROGEN 

Amino  acids  and  other  amino  compounds  can  be  determined 
gravimetrically  or  colorimetrically,  either  by  the  Van  Slyke 
method,^  which  is  based  upon  the  interaction  of  nitrous  acid  with 
the  amiino  group,  giving  gaseous  nitrogen;  by  the  Sorensen  for- 
malin titration  method, ^  and  by  the  Folin  colorimetric  method.^ 

QUANTITATIVE  DETERMINATION  OF  CARBOHYDRATES 

1.  Free  Celluloses. — True  celluloses  are  characterized  by  the 
fact  that  they  are  insoluble  in  dilute  acids  (2  to  4  per  cent),  but 
they  are  soluble  in  concentrated  acids,  such  as  42  per  cent  hydro- 
chloric or  72  per  cent  sulphuric.  The  quantitative  determination 
of  pure  cellulose  in  soil  or  in  culture  is  based  upon  its  solu- 
bility in  ammoniacal  copper  solution,  from  which  it  is  reprecipi- 
tated  by  alcohol. 

Preparation  of  Schweitzer^ s  Reagent. — Two  hundred  grams  of 
copper  sulphate  are  dissolved  in  hot  water  and  precipitated  with  a 
calculated  amount  of  ammonia  (95  cubic  centimeters  of  ammonia, 
specific  gravity  0.90).  The  excess  of  ammonia  is  then  neutral- 
ized with  sulphuric  acid.  The  precipitate  is  washed  by  decanta- 
tion  in  a  large  bottle  three  or  four  times  and  is  then  transferred 
to  a  Biichner  funnel  and  filtered  through  hardened  filter  paper 
by  the  use  of  suction.  With  the  aid  of  a  porcelain  spoon  the 
excess  of  water  is  pressed  out  from  the  copper  hydroxide.  It  is 
then  removed  in  the  form  of  a  hardened  paste  from  the  filter 
paper  and  introduced  into  a  bottle  containing  ammonia  water 
and  shaken  in  a  shaking  machine  for  4  to  5  hours.  An  undissolved 
part  of  the  copper  hydroxide  should  remain  at  the  bottom  of  the 
flask.  The  Schweitzer's  reagent  prepared  in  this  way  should 
contain  1.5  grams  of  copper  per  100  cubic  centimeters  of  solution. 

1  Van  Slyke,  D.  D.,  J.  Biol.  Chem.,  10:  15-55,  1911,  12:  275-284,  1912; 
16:  539-547,  1913. 

2  Sorensen,  S.  P.  L.,  Biochem.  Z.,  7:  45,  1907-1908. 

3  Folin,  0.,  J.  Biol.  Chem.,  51:  377,  1922. 


70  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

To  test  the  strength  of  the  reagent,  5  cubic  centimeters  are 
placed  in  a  crucible  of  constant  weight,  near  a  dish  of  H2SO4 
under  a  bell  jar.  As  soon  as  all  the  ammonia  is  absorbed,  the 
Cu(0H)2  is  dried  and  heated  to  constant  weight  and  weighed  as 
CuO. 

Cellulose  Determination.^ — Cellulose  is  added  to  the  soil  either  in 
the  form  of  finely  cut  or  well  ground  filter  paper.  After  the  soil 
is  properly  mixed,  a  20-gram  sample  is  obtained  from  moist,  or 
preferably  air-dried,  soil.  The  sample  is  placed  in  a  250-cubic 
centimeter  sampling  bottle,  100  cubic  centimeters  of  Schweit- 
zer's reagent  is  added;  the  bottle  is  then  stoppered  with  a 
rubber  stopper  and  shaken  for  an  hour  in  a  shaking  machine. 
After  settling,  somewhat  more  than  50  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
liquid  is  filtered  through  a  Gooch  crucible  by  the  use  of  suction. 
Fifty  cubic  centimeters  of  the  filtrate  are  then  precipitated  with 
200  cubic  centimeters  of  80  per  cent  alcohol  and  the  precipitate 
is  filtered  through  a  Gooch  crucible  and  washed  as  follows:  (1) 
dilute  1  per  cent  HCl,  (2)  warm  distilled  water,  (3)  dilute  2  per 
cent  KOH  to  get  rid  of  humic  acids — washing  with  KOH  is 
continued  until  all  brown  color  disappears,  (4)  warm  distilled 
water,  (5)  dilute  1  per  cent  HCl  to  get  rid  of  free  alkali,  (6)  warm 
distilled  water  until  free  from  chlorides,  (7)  alcohol — after 
cooling  the  crucible,  (8)  ether. 

Dry  to  constant  weight  at  110°C.,  weigh,  burn  off  and  weigh 
again.  The  difference  between  the  two  weights  gives  the 
quantity  of  cellulose  for  10  grams  of  the  sample. 

2.  Celluloses  in  Plant  Tissues. — Treat  fresh  or  decomposed 
material  with  2  per  cent  solution  of  hydrochloric  acid  for  5  hours 
under  reflux  condenser.  Filter,  and  wash  residue.  Take  aliquot 
portion  of  residue  and  treat  with  10  volumes  of  80  per  cent  solu- 
tion of  H2SO4,  then  proceed  as  outlined  on  page  77.  Calculate 
cellulose  content  in  original  material. 

3.  Pentosans. — The  determination  of  pentosans  is  based  upon 
their  transformation  into  furfural  when  boiled  with  12  per  cent 
hydrochloric  acid :  2  grams  of  material  are  placed  in  a  500-cubic 
centimeter   flask   provided    with   a   separatory   funnel  and  an 

1  Charpentier,  C.  a.  G.  Thesis,  Helsingfors,  1921;  Waksman,  S.  A.,  and 
O.  Heukelekian,  Soil  Sci.,  17:  275-292,  1924;  Barthel,  Chr.,  Abder- 
halden's  Handbuch,  p.  754,  1927. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  71 

outlet  tube  connected  with  condenser.  One  hundred  cubic 
centimeters  of  12  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid  (specific  gravity 
1.06)  is  added  from  separatory  funnel,  and  30  cubic  centimeters 
distilled  over  in  10  minutes,  the  distillate  passing  through  small 
filter  paper  into  receiver.  As  soon  as  30  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
distillate  are  collected,  30  cubic  centimeters  more  HCl  is  added  to 
flask  and  distillation  continued.  This  is  repeated  until  270  cubic 
centimeters  of  distillate  are  collected.  Forty  cubic  centimeters  of 
filtered  phloroglucide  solution  (11  grams  of  phloroglucinol 
dissolved  in  300  cubic  centimeters  of  12  per  cent  hydrochloric 
acid)  are  added  to  the  distillate  and  made  up  to  400  cubic  centi- 
meters with  hydrochloric  acid.  After  standing  16  hours,  the 
precipitate  is  filtered  off  using  a  weighed  Gooch  crucible  with 
thick  asbestos  mat.  Wash  with  150  cubic  centimeters  of  water, 
dry  at  100  to  105°C.  for  4  hours,  and  weigh.  If  a  is  the  weight 
of  the  precipitate,  the  pentosan  content  is,  when  less  than  0.03 
gram 

(a  -  0.0052)  X  0.8949. 

When  the  precipitate  weighs  0.03  to  0.3  gram,  the  pentosan 
content  is 

(a  -  0.0052)  X  0.8866. 

4.  Starches. — Starches  are  soluble  in  hot  water  and  are  readily 
hydrolized  by  dilute  acids  and  by  diastatic  enzymes  giving  the 
reducing  sugars  maltose  and  glucose. 

A  definite  amount  of  material  (4  to  5  grams),  previously 
extracted  with  ether  and  alcohol,  is  treated  with  50  cubic  centi- 
meters of  water,  in  a  double  boiler  and  brought  to  the  boiling 
point;  it  is  kept  at  that  point  for  15  minutes,  until  all  the  starch 
has  gelatinized.  The  mixture  is  then  cooled  to  50°C.  and  treated 
with  10  cubic  centimeters  of  malt  extract.  The  temperature 
(50°C.)  is  maintained  for  30  to  60  minutes.  The  mixture  is 
again  heated,  cooled  to  50°C.,  again  treated  with  10  cubic  centi- 
meters of  the  malt  extract,  and  incubated  for  30  to  60  minutes, 
until  no  blue  color  is  given  with  iodine  solution.  The  mixture  is 
made  up  to  250  cubic  centimeters  and  filtered  through  paper; 
200  cubic  centimeters  of  the  filtrate  is  treated  with  20  cubic 
centimeters  of  hydrochloric  acid  solution  (specific  gravity 
1.125)    and    heated,    under   a    reflux    condenser,    for    2    hours. 


72  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

The  solution  is  cooled,  neutralized  with  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion, and  made  up  to  500  cubic  centimeters.  The  solution  is 
filtered  and  reducing  sugar  (glucose)  determined  in  an  aliquot 
portion.  A  blank  determination  of  20  cubic  centimeters  malt 
extract  boiled  with  acid  as  before  outHned  is  subtracted.  The 
amount  of  glucose  calculated  is  multiplied  by  0.9  to  give  the 
weight  of  starch. 

5.  Reducing  Sugars. — Reducing  sugars  may  be  determined  con- 
veniently by  the  Bertrand  or  the  modified  Shaffer  and  Hart- 
mann^  method  or  by  any  other  convenient  method. 
Micro  Method. — Prepare  the  following  reagents: 
(a)  Combined  micro  reagent: 

Grams  per  Liter 

CuSOrSHzO 5.0 

Tartaric  acid 7.5 

NazCOa  (anhydrous) 40 . 0 

KI 10.0 

KIO3 0.7 

Potassium  oxalate 18.4 

The  sodium  carbonate  is  dissolved  in  about  400  cubic  centi- 
meters of  warm  water,  and  into  this,  with  stirring,  is  poured  the 
copper  sulphate  and  tartaric  acid  dissolved  in  about  150  cubic 
centimeters  of  water.  The  iodate,  iodide,  and  oxalate  are 
dissolved  in  about  250  cubic  centimeters  of  water,  rinsed  into 
the  alkaline  copper  solution,  cooled  and  diluted  to  a  liter.  It  is 
usually  more  convenient  to  make  up  a  larger  quantity  based  on 
the  same  proportion  of  reagents. 

(5)  lA^  H2SO4  —  27  cubic  centimeters  of  concentrated  H2SO4 
are  poured  into  a  quantity  of  water  and  diluted  to  a  liter.  The 
resulting  solution  is  approximately  normal  but  can  be  readily 
adjusted  by  titration. 

(c)  O.IA^  thiosulphate — 25  grams  of  pure  sodium  thiosulphate 
and  1  gram  of  NaOH  are  dissolved  in  water  and  diluted  to  a  liter. 
This  should  give  a  solution  a  trifle  stronger  than  O.liV.  It  can 
be  readily  standardized  with  a  solution  of  O.IA^  K2Cr207. 
To  prepare  this  solution  pure  K2Cr207  is  dried  at  110°C.,  and 
4.9033  grams  are  dissolved  in  water  and  diluted  to  1  liter. 
Twenty-five  cubic  centimeters  of  the  standard  dichromate  are 

1  Stiles,  H.  R.,  W.  H.  Peterson,  and  E.  B.  Fred,  /.  Bad.,  12:  427-439, 
1926. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  73 

transferred  to  a  large  beaker  containing  about  3  grams  KI  and 

10   cubic   centimeters   strong   HCl   in   aqueous   solution.     The 

contents  are  diluted  to  500  or  600  cubic  centimeters  and  titrated 

with  the  thiosulphate.     Starch  paste  is  added  toward  the  end 

of  the  reaction,  and  at  the  end  point  the  solution  turns  from  a 

blue  to  a  light  green.     If  the  thiosulphate   used   is  pure,  the 

volume  will  be  a  little  less  than  25  cubic  centimeters,  and  the 

solution  can  be  readily  adjusted  to  O.IN  by  dilution  with  water. 

Thus  if  the  titration  is  24.7  cubic  centimeters  thiosulphate,  every 

24.7  cubic  centimeters  of  thiosulphate  solution  should  have  added 

to  it  0.3  cubic  centimeters  water,  or  to  914  cubic  centimeters  of  the 

914 
remaining  solution  add  ^-^  X  0.3  or  11.1  cubic  centimeters  of 

water.  The  resulting  solution  should  be  O.liV  and  can  be 
readily  checked  against  the  O.IA^  dichromate.  The  O.IA^  thio- 
sulphate solution  thus  prepared  will  keep  its  strength  for  more 
than  a  year.  To  make  0.005iV  thiosulphate,  25  cubic  centimeters 
of  the  O.liV  solution  are  diluted  to  500  cubic  centimeters  in  a 
volumetric  flask  and  mixed.  This  solution  keeps  for  only  a  few 
days  and  is  best  prepared  anew  for  each  set  of  determinations. 

(d)  Basic  lead  acetate,  Home  reagent — A  33  per  cent  solution 
is  used. 

(e)  Phosphate  solution — For  removing  excess  lead,  a  10  per 
cent  solution  of  Na2HP04'12H20  is  used.  Three  cubic  centi- 
meters are  required  for  every  cubic  centimeter  of  the  lead  acetate 
solution  used.  Add  phenolphthalein  and  if  alkaline  or  acid 
neutralize. 

Place  10  or  25  cubic  centimeters  of  culture,  depending  on  the 
percentage  of  sugar,  in  a  50-cubic  centimeter  volumetric  flask, 
add  a  few  drops  of  phenolphthalein  and  neutralize  with  sodium 
hydroxide.  Add  1  cubic  centimeter  of  lead  acetate  solution, 
shake,  and  then  add  3  cubic  centimeters  of  phosphate  solution. 
If  alkaline  or  acid,  neutralize,  dilute  to  exactly  50  cubic  centi- 
meters and  mix  thoroughly  by  inverting.  Let  stand  for  3 
minutes  and  then  remove  an  aliquot  for  analysis  by  means  of  a 
pipette.  If  chlorides  or  other  compounds  precipitable  by  lead 
are  present,  a  little  more  of  the  lead  acetate  solution  can  be  used. 
An  excess  of  lead  acetate  is  to  be  avoided  for  some  of  the  sugar 
will  be  carried  down  with  the  precipitate. 


74 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


Micro  Sugar  Table — Glucose  Corresponding  to  Difference 
IN  Titration  between  Control  and  Sample 


0.005  N 

Thiosul- 

phate, 

Cubic 

Centimeters 

0.005  N 

0.005  N 

0.005  N 

Glucose, 
Milli- 
gram 

Thiosul- 
phate, 
Cubic 
Centi- 
meters 

Glucose, 

Milli- 
grams 

Thiosul- 
phate. 
Cubic 
Centi- 
meters 

Glucose, 

Milli- 
grams 

Thiosul- 
phate, 
Cubic 
Centi- 
meters 

Glucose, 
Milli- 
grams 

0.3 

0.067 

4.1 

0.622 

8.1 

1.159 

12.1 

1.649 

0.4 

0.086 

4.2 

0.634 

8.2 

1.173 

12.2 

1.662 

0.5 

0.105 

4.3 

0.647 

8.3 

1.186 

12.3 

1.674 

0.6 

0.125 

4.4 

0.660 

8.4 

1.198 

12.4 

1.687 

0.7 

0.142 

4.5 

0.672 

8.5 

1.211 

12.5 

1.700 

0.8 

0.157 

4.6 

0.685 

8.6 

1.224 

12.6 

1.713 

0.9 

0.173 

4.7 

0.698 

8.7 

1.237 

12.7 

1.728 

1.0 

0.191 

4.8 

0.713 

8.8 

1.249 

12.8 

1.742 

4.9 

0.729 

8.9 

1.262 

12.9 

1.756 

1.1 

0.210 

5.0 

0.745 

9.0 

1.275 

13.0 

1.770 

1.2 

0.229 

1.3 

0.247 

5.1 

0.759 

9.1 

1.288 

13.1 

1.785 

1.4 

0.263 

5.2 

0.772 

9.2 

1.300 

13.2 

1.800 

1.5 

0.279 

5.3 

0.784 

9.3 

1.313 

13.3 

1.813 

1.6 

0.294 

5.4 

0.797 

9.4 

1.326 

13.4 

1.827 

1.7 

0.306 

5.5 

0.810 

9.5 

1.339 

13.5 

1.842 

1.8 

0.319 

5.6 

0.822 

9.6 

1.354 

13.6 

1.856 

1.9 

0.332 

5.7 

0.837 

9.7 

1.368 

13.7 

1.871 

2.0 

0.344 

5.8 

0.852 

9.8 

1.382 

13.8 

1.885 

5.9 

0.868 

9.9 

1.397 

13.9 

1.899 

2.1 

0.357 

6.0 

0.882 

10.0 

1.411 

14.0 

1.913 

2.2 

0.370 

2.3 

0.382 

6.1 

0.892 

10.1 

1.424 

14.1 

1.928 

2.4 

0.395 

6.2 

0.902 

10.2 

1.435 

14.2 

1.942 

2.5 

0.408 

6.3 

0.911 

10.3 

1.446 

14.3 

1.956 

2.6 

0.421 

6.4 

0.926 

10.4 

1.457 

14.4 

1.971 

2.7 

0.434 

6.5 

0.940 

10.5 

1.469 

14.5 

1.984 

2.8 

0.446 

6.6 

0.955 

10.6 

1.480 

14.6 

1.997 

2.9 

0.461 

6.7 

0.969 

10.7 

1.491 

14.7 

2.010 

3.0 

0.477 

6.8 

0.983 

10.8 

1.502 

14.8 

2.022 

6.9 

0.997 

10.9 

1.513 

14.9 

2.035 

3.1 

0.493 

7.0 

1.010 

11.0 

1.524 

15.0 

2.048 

3.2 

0.507 

3.3 

0.520 

7.1 

1.023 

11.1 

1.535 

3.4 

0.532 

7.2 

1.036 

11.2 

1.547 

3.5 

0.545 

7.3 

1.048 

11.3 

1.558 

3.6 

0.558 

7.4 

1.061 

11.4 

1.569 

3.7 

0.571 

7.5 

1.074 

11.5 

1.580 

3.8 

0.583 

7.6 

1.088 

11.6 

1.591 

3.9 

0.596 

7.7 

1.102 

11.7 

1.602 

4.0 

0.609 

7.8 

1.116 

11.8 

1.613 

7.9 

1.130 

11.9 

1.624 

8.0 

1.145 

12.0 

1.636 

QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  75 

Place  5  cubic  centimeters  of  the  micro  reagent  in  a  50-cubic 
centimeter  Pyrex  test  tube  and  to  this  add  from  1  to  5  cubic 
centimeters,  depending  upon  the  quantity  of  sugar  present,  of 
the  clarified  sample.  If  less  than  5  cubic  centimeters  of  sample  is 
taken,  add  sufficient  water  to  make  the  total  volume  10  cubic 
centimeters.  At  the  same  time  make  up  a  blank  with  5  cubic 
centimeters  of  water  and  5  cubic  centimeters  of  reagent.  Stopper 
the  test  tubes  with  loose-fitting  corks,  to  prevent  oxidation  from 
the  air,  and  heat  for  15  minutes  in  a  boiling  water  bath.  Cool 
in  running  water,  add  5  cubic  centimeters  of  IN  H2SO4,  shake 
well,  let  stand  1  minute  and  titrate  with  O.OOSiV  thiosulphate 
and  starch  paste  as  an  indicator.  Add  the  starch  solution  when 
the  solution  has  turned  a  light  straw  color  which  indicates  that 
only  a  trace  of  iodine  remains.  Continue  the  titration  with 
thiosulphate  until  the  blue  color  of  the  starch  iodine  compound 
completely  disappears.  The  end  point  is  very  sharp — within 
1  to  2  drops  of  thiosulphate. 

Calculation  may  be  made  directly  from  the  micro-sugar  table. 
The  titration  of  the  sample  in  cubic  centimeters  of  O.OOSA^ 
thiosulphate  is  subtracted  from  the  titration  of  the  blank, 
the  difference  found  in  the  table  and  read  in  milligrams  of 
glucose.  The  glucose  per  cubic  centimeter  of  sample  is  then 
calculated  from  the  glucose  found  in  the  aliquot  taken. 

When  1  cubic  centimeter  of  culture  is  taken  for  the  direct  deter- 
mination, this  method  will  accommodate  samples  containing  up  to 
0.20  per  cent  glucose.  If  the  sugar  percentage  is  greater,  the 
sample  must  be  diluted.  For  a  sugar  concentration  of  about  0.50 
per  cent,  a  convenient  dilution  would  be  10  cubic  centimeters  made 
up  to  50  cubic  centimeters  and  a  1  cubic  centimeter  aUquot 
taken. 

6.  Lignins. — ^Lignins  are  prepared  and  determined  by  treating 
natural  or  decomposed  organic  tnaterials  with  42  per  cent  hy- 
drochloric acid,^  72  per  cent  sulphuric  acid  or  a  mixture  of 
hydrochloric  and  sulphuric  acids;  the  acids  decompose  all  the 
celluloses,  pentosans  and  proteins,  leaving  the  lignins  unattacked. 
Four  2-gram  portions  of  organic  material,  such  as  straw,  ground 
wood  shavings,  etc.,  are  treated  with  ether  to  remove  the  fats 

1  WiLLSTATTER,  R.,  and  L.  Zeichmeister,  Ber.  deut.  Chem.  GeselL,  46: 
2401,  1913.     ScHWALLEE,  H.,  Papi&rfabr.,  23:  174-177,  1925. 


76  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

and  waxes.  After  the  ether  has  been  removed,  the  residue  is 
placed  in  a  glass-stoppered  flask  or  bottle  and  covered  with  10 
cubic  centimeters  of  18  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid  solution  and 
50  cubic  centimeters  of  72  per  cent  sulphuric  acid  solution. 
The  flask  is  stoppered,  shaken,  and  immediately  immersed  in  cold 
water.  The  reacting  mixture  is  allowed  to  stand  for  2  to  3 
hours,  then  transferred  with  300  cubic  centimeters  of  water  to 
500-cubic  centimeter  flasks  and  boiled  for  30  minutes.  The 
residue  is  filtered  off  upon  dried  and  weighed  paper  or  Gooch 
crucible,  and  washed  with  an  excess  of  water.  The  residues 
are  then  dried  at  70°C.  to  constant  weight.  Two  portions  are 
used  for  ashing  and  two  for  determination  of  total  nitrogen  by 
the  Kjeldahl  method.  (The  weight  of  the  dry  residue) — (the 
weight  of  ash  +  weight  of  nitrogen  X  6.25)  =  amount  of  lignin. 

COMPLETE   ANALYSIS   OF   NATURAL   OR   DECOMPOSED  PLANT 

MATERIAL! 

An  approximately  complete  analysis  of  a  natural  organic 
material  is  carried  out  as  follows: 

1.  Moisture  is  determined  on  two  5-gram  portions  of  material. 

2.  Total  nitrogen  is  determined  on  two  2-gram  portions  of 
material. 

3.  Ash  on  two  2-gram  portions. 

4.  Pentosans  on  two  2-gram  portions. 

5.  Two  5-gram  portions  are  analyzed  as  follows: 

(a)  Treat  for  12  hours  with  ether  in  Soxhlets.  The  ether 
extract  is  evaporated  to  a  small  volume,  then  transferred  to 
weighing  bottles  and  dried  to  constant  weight,  giving  ether 
soluble  fraction. 

(6)  Residue  from  ether  treatment  is  extracted  for  24  hours 
with  cold  water.  Extract  is  made  up  to  volume  and  divided  into 
four  portions,  one  to  be  used  for  total  nitrogen  determination, 
one  for  determination  of  total  soluble  organic  matter  by  evaporat- 
ing in  silica  dishes,  one  for  determination  of  reducing  sugar, 
and  one  for  the  determination  of  ammonia  or  nitrate. 

(c)  Residue  from  cold  water  extraction  is  treated  with  100  cubic 
centimeters  hot  water,  boiling  to  be  continued  for  30  to  60 
minutes.     The  solution  is  analyzed  as  in  (b). 

1  Waksman,  S.  A.,  and  F.  G.  Tenney,  Soil  Sci.,  24:  317-341  (1927)  26: 
113-137  (1928). 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  77 

(d)  The  residue  from  the  hot  water  extraction  is  now  treated 
two  or  three  times  with  boihng  95  per  cent  alcohol.  The  alco- 
holic solution  is  evaporated  in  a  weighing  bottle  and  dried  to 
constant  weight. 

(e)  The  residue  from  the  alcohol  extraction  is  treated  with  100 
cubic  centimeters  of  a  2  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid  solution  and 
boiled  under  a  reflux  condenser  for  5  to  6  hours.  The  solution  is 
filtered  off,  through  dried  and  weighed  filter  papers,  and  the 
residue  is  washed  with  dilute  acid,  then  with  distilled  water, 
until  free  from  acid.  The  filtrate  and  washings  are  now  analyzed 
for  reducing  sugars,  by  the  Bertrand  method,  and  for  total 
nitrogen.  The  amount  of  reducing  sugar  multiplied  by  0.9  gives 
the  hemicellulose  content  of  the  material. 

(/)  The  washed  residue  from  the  hydrochloric  acid  extraction 
is  dried  to  constant  weight.  Two  1-gram  portions  of  the  dry 
material  are  placed  in  300-cubic  centimeter  Erlenmeyer  flasks 
and  treated  with  10  cubic  centimeters  of  an  80  per  cent  sulphuric 
acid  solution  (if  the  residue  is  compacted,  it  should  be  first  well 
ground;  if  it  is  horny,  it  should  have  been  washed  with  alcohol 
and  ether,  before  drying),  for  2  hours,  in  the  cold.  The  acid 
must  be  brought  in  contact  with  all  particles  of  the  material. 
After  2  hours,  150  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled  water  is  added  to 
each  flask  and  contents  autoclaved  for  1  hour  at  120°C.,  or 
boiled  for  2  to  3  hours  under  the  reflux  condenser.  The  con- 
tents are  then  filtered  through  small  dried  and  weighed  filter 
papers  or  through  weighed  Gooch  crucibles.  The  residue  is 
well  washed  with  water  to  wash  out  traces  of  sulphuric  acid. 
The  combined  solution  and  filtrate  are  analyzed  for  reducing 
sugar.  The  amount  of  glucose  found  multiplied  by  0.9  gives  the 
cellulose  content  of  the  material.  Of  the  four  residues  for  each 
original  material,  two  are  used  for  ash  and  two  for  nitrogen 
determinations.  Weight  of  -(residue)  —  (ash  +  nitrogen  X 
6.25)  =  lignin  content.  The  cellulose  and  lignin  found  in  1 
gram  of  residue  left  from  the  2  per  cent  HCl  extraction  are 
now  multiplied  by  the  number  of  grams  in  this  residue  to 
give  the  cellulose  and  lignin  content  in  the  original  5  grams 
of  material. 


78  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

HUMUS  DETERMINATION  1 

Place  six  50-gram  samples  of  soil,  previously  well  mixed  and 
sieved  through  a  1-millimeter  sieve,  into  six  500-cubic  centimeter 
beakers.  Add  to  each  50-cubic  centimeters  of  2.5  per  cent  NaOH 
solution.  Place  beakers  in  autoclave  and  heat  for  30  minutes 
at  15  pounds  pressure.  Add  50-cubic  centimeter  portions  of 
cold  distilled  water  to  each  beaker,  and  filter  the  dark-colored 
solution  through  folded  filter  paper.  After  draining  off  all  the 
dark  solution  from  the  soil,  add  again  fresh  portions  of  50-cubic 
centimeters  of  2.5  per  cent  NaOH  solution  to  the  same  soils 
previously  extracted,  and  heat  again  as  before.  Add  water  and 
filter  upon  the  same  papers.  Wash  soil  with  50-cubic  centimeter 
portions  of  hot  distilled  water. 

The  combined  filtrates  are  collected  in  500-cubic  centimeter 
Erlenmeyer  flasks  and  treated  with  a  hot  solution  of  hydrochloric 
acid  1:1,  until  a  heavy  precipitate  is  formed;  add  half  as  much 
more  acid  as  was  required  to  form  the  precipitate;  warm  and 
shake  well.  Filter  off  precipitates  (a-fraction  of  soil  organic 
matter  or  ''humic  acid")  through  filter  papers,  previously 
weighed  and  dried,  or  through  Gooch  crucibles.  Wash  with 
warm  10  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid,  then  a  number  of  times  with 
distilled  water.  Dry  the  precipitates  at  65  to  70°C.  for  24  hours 
and  weigh.  Three  portions  are  used  for  ash  determination  and 
three  for  total  nitrogen  determinations.  If  the  precipitation 
and  washing  with  acid  have  been  thorough,  the  ash  content  should 
not  exceed  1  to  2  per  cent. 

The  filtrate  from  the  acid  precipitate  is  now  treated  with  a  5 
per  cent  solution  of  NaOH,  until  just  neutral  to  litmus  or  until 
solution  has  reached  a  pH  of  4.8  to  5.0.  A  heavy  precipitate 
will  be  formed  in  case  of  mineral  soils.  The  precipitate  (j8- 
fraction)  is  filtered  off  through  a  series  of  fresh  papers,  previously 
dried  and  weighed,  or  through  Gooch  crucibles.  These  precipi- 
tates are  washed  thoroughly  with  distilled  water,  dried  and 
weighed.  Three  portions  are  used  again  for  ash  and  three  for 
nitrogen  determinations.  The  nitrogen  content  of  an  aliquot 
portion  of  the  filtrate  from  the  second  precipitate  is  also 
determined. 

Tabulate  results. 

1  Waksman,  S.  a.,  Soil  Sci.,  22:  221-232,  1926;  Springer,  U.,  Zischr. 
Pflanzenern,  Dung.  Bodenk.,  IIA:  313-359,  1928. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS 


79 


CARBON  DIOXIDE  EVOLUTION 

Evolution  of  carbon  dioxide  from  soil,  to  which  no  fresh 
quantities  of  undecomposed  organic  matter  are  added,  is  best 
determined  using  1-kilogram  quantities  of  soil.  Fresh,  sieved 
soil  is  placed  in  small  unglazed  porcelain  pots  holding  just  about 
1  kilogram  of  soil.  The  pots  are  placed  upon  wooden  bases  and 
covered  with  bell  jars,  which  are  sealed  down  to  the  stand  with 


r 


D£ 


Fig.  3.- 


-Apparatus  for  the  study  of  the  influence  of  plant  growth  upon  the 
evolution  of  CO 2  from  soil.      {Neller.) 


paraffin.  Air,  freed  from  carbon  dioxide  by  passing  through  soda- 
lime  and  through  bottles  containing  10  per  cent  sulphuric  acid,  is 
drawn  through  the  bell  jars,  by  means  of  glass  tubes  passed 
through  the  wooden  stands.  The  air  is  then  drawn  through 
absorption  towers  containing  50  cubic  centimeters  of  barium 
hydroxide  solution. 

When  the  decomposition  of  fresh  organic  matter  in  soil  is 
studied,  100-gram  quantities  of  soil  may  be  used.     Long-necked, 


80  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

flat-bottomed  flasks  of  300-cubic  centimeter  capacity  are  used 
for  this  purpose.  The  soil  and  the  proper  amount  of  organic 
matter  are  introduced  into  the  flasks;  the  moisture  of  the  soil  is 
brought  to  the  desired  concentration  and  the  flasks  connected 
with  the  respiration  apparatus.  The  air,  freed  from  CO2  as 
before,  is  passed  through  the  flasks  over  the  surface  of  the  soil. 
The  CO2  is  absorbed  in  100-cubic  centimeter  heavy-walled  test- 
tubes  containing  25  to  50  cubic  centimeters  of  the  standard 
barium  hydroxide  solution.  The  excess  barium  hydroxide  is 
then  titrated  back  with  standard  oxalic  acid  solution  (see  also 
Fig.  19,  Exercise  58). 

DETERMINATION  OF  TOTAL  CARBON 

Total  carbon  can  be  determined  by  (1)  the  various  dry  com- 
bustion methods,  including  the  bomb  method  (with  Na202),  and 
(2)  wet  combustion  methods,  using  a  mixture  of  chromic  and 
sulphuric  orchromic  and  phosphoric  acids  or  permanganate  and 
sulphuric  acid.  The  following  method  was  found  to  give  very 
good  results,  especially  with  liquid  cultures  (see  Fig.  4). 

A  definite  portion  of  liquid  culture  or  soil,  containing  not 
more  than  100  to  120  milligrams  of  carbon,  is  placed  in  a  200-  to 
500-cubic  centimeter  round-bottomed  Pyrex  flask  {B  of  Fig.  4). 
In  case  of  liquid  materials,  the  water  should  be  evaporated  on  a 
steam  bath  before  beginning  the  analysis.  The  flask  is  then 
attached  to  the  condenser  D,  and  10  cubic  centimeters  of  an 
oxidizing  solution  (85  grams  chromic  anhydride  in  100  cubic 
centimeters  of  water  made  up  to  250  cubic  centimeters  with  85 
per  cent  phosphoric  acid)  is  introduced  through  the  separatory 
funnel  C.  Gentle  suction  is  then  applied  and  25  to  40  cubic 
centimeters  of  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  concentrated  phos- 
phoric and  sulphuric  acids  are  added.  The  stopcock  in  C  is  closed 
and  by  the  use  of  a  low  flame,  flask  B  is  heated  as  rapidly  as 
possible  without  developing  pressure  within.  The  gas  is  drawn 
out  through  condenser  D  and  through  a  U-tube  E,  which  con- 
tains a  saturated  solution  of  Ag2S04  and  5  per  cent  H2SO4  in 
20-mesh  pumice  on  the  left  side  1,  and  boiled  concentrated  H2SO4 
in  20-mesh  pumice  on  the  right  side  2.  The  Ag2S04  serves  to 
remove  the  chlorine  and  the  H2SO4  the  SO3  fumes.  The  gas  is 
then  drawn  through  the  absorption  flask  F  and  absorbed  in  a 
measured  quantity  of  O.bN  NaOH  solution.     After  flask  B  has 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS 


81 


been  boiled  gently  for  15  to  20  minutes,  flask  F  is  removed,  the 
solution  washed  down  into  the  flask,  the  carbon  precipitated 
by  the  addition  of  an  excess  of  2  iV  neutral  BaCU  solution, 
and  the  excess  alkah  titrated  with  0.5A^  HCl  solution  using 
phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator. 


Fig.  4.' — Apparatus  for  determination  of  total  carbon  in  soil  or  in  solution. 

The  absorption  flask  F  is  made  of  a  300-cubic  centimeter 
Erlenmeyer  flask,  a  1.5  X  25  cm.  test  tube,  and  a  few  glass  beads. 
The  bottom  of  the  test  tube  is  drawn  out  and  while  still  hot  the 
upper  part  of  the  constriction  is  flattened  so  that  two  beads  will 
lie  over  the  opening  instead  of  one,  so  as  to  facilitate  washing  out. 


82  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Suction  Flask. — The  suction  flask  H  is  provided  with  a  constant 
pressure  valve  /  which  is  made  from  small  glass  T-tube  in  which 
a  rubber  band  holds  a  small  rubber  disk  over  the  lower  end.  By 
the  aid  of  this  valve  and  the  screw  cock  G,  the  flow  of  air  can  be 
easily  regulated  and  should  not  exceed  about  120  bubbles  per 
minute. 

1  cubic  centimeter  0.5A^  NaOH  =c=  3.0  milligrams  of  carbon. 
Cubic  centimeters  NaOH  added—  cubic  centimeters  HCl  used  X 

3  =  milligrams  carbon. 

SEED  STERILIZATION 

Although  a  great  number  of  methods  employing  various  agents 
have  been  recommended  for  removing  microorganisms  from  seed, 
only  a  few  of  the  more  promising  ones  will  be  given.  Where  it  is 
not  necessary  to  render  the  seeds  free  of  bacteria,  but  merely  to 
destroy  the  majority  of  the  flora,  alcohol  may  be  used. 

Among  the  chemicals  that  have  proved  satisfactory  for  steriliz- 
ing seed,  mercuric  chloride,  hypochlorite  of  lime,  and  silver 
nitrate  are  the  most  commonly  used.  The  effectiveness  of  these 
substances  depends  on  many  factors:  strength  of  solution,  time 
of  exposure,  temperature,  pressure,  and  nature  of  the  seed  coat. 

Sterilization  hy  Mercuric  Chloride  in  Vacuum. — Select  a  large 
heavy  walled  desiccator  and  connect  to  vacuum  pump. 

Fill  test  tubes  or  flasks  about  one-half  full  of  seed,  cover  with 
0.25  per  cent  solution  of  mercuric  chloride  and  place  in  the 
desiccator. 

Exhaust  for  3  to  5  minutes  depending  upon  the  kind  of  seed. 
This  should  remove  the  air  particles  from  around  the  seed  coats 
and  allow  the  disinfectant  to  come  in  direct  contact  with  the 
seed. 

At  the  end  of  this  time  remove  the  mercuric  chloride  solution 
and  run  in  a  small  amount  of  sterile  water,  shake  vigorously, 
empty,  and  repeat  this  process  three  or  four  times. 

Remove  some  of  the  seed  to  sterile  Petri  dishes  and  pour  over 
them  a  layer  of  nutrient  agar. 

After  the  agar  hardens,  invert  and  place  in  the  incubator  at 
20  to  25°C.  In  2  or  3  days  the  seed  should  germinate.  If 
bacteria  or  molds  are  present,  they  may  be  readily  noted  on 
the  agar. 


QUALITATIVE  AND  QUANTITATIVE  ANALYSIS  83 

Sterilization  by  Calcium  Hypochlorite.^ — 1.  Add  10  grams  of 
commercial  chloride  of  lime  (titrating  28  per  cent  chlorine)  to 
140  cubic  centimeters  of  water. 

2.  Allow  the  mixture  to  settle  for  5  or  10  minutes  and  decant 
the  supernatant  liquid.  This  solution  should  contain  about  2  per 
cent  of  chlorine. 

3.  For  seed  sterilization  the  solution  may  be  diluted  or  used 
full  strength.  The  volume  of  the  liquid  should  be  about  five 
times  that  of  the  seed. 

4.  Place  the  seed  in  a  sterile  test  tube  and  cover  with  a  1  per 
cent  chlorine  solution  (original  solution  diluted  one-half). 

5.  The  time  required  for  sterilizing  varies  with  the  different 
seeds,  about  6  hours  for  alfalfa,  8  hours  for  corn,  and  15  hours  for 
wheat. 

1  Wilson,  J.  K,  Am.  J.  BoL,  2:  420-427.  1915. 


PART  IV 
EXERCISES 


THE   STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL 

A.  Suggested  Arrangement  of  Class  Exercises  in  Soil  Micro- 
biology for  Course  of  Five  Credits  for  one  Semester 
of  18  Weeks 

Because  of  the  time  required  for  the  incubation  of  the  different 
groups  of  microorganisms,  it  is  suggested  that  the  exercises  be 
given  in  the  order  listed  below. 
Introduction 

General  Characteristics  of  the  Soil  Population: 

1.  Bacteria. 

2.  Fungi. 

3.  Algse. 

4.  Protozoa. 

5.  Invertebrate  population  of  soil,  non-protozoan  in  nature. 

6.  Approximate  number  of  microorganisms  in  soil. 

A.  Microscopic  examination  of  microorganisms: 

1.  Examination  of  living  microorganisms  in  hanging  drops. 

2.  Examination  of  bacteria  in  Congo  red  or  Nigrosin  preparations;  of 
yeast  and  yeast  spores  in  Erythrosin  or  Rose  Bengal  preparations. 

B.  Methods  for  counting  numbers  of  microorganisms : 

3.  Number  of  algae  in  soil  according  to  dilution  method. 

4.  Number  of  protozoa  according  to  the  dilution  method. 

5.  Number  of  fungi  according  to  the  plate  method. 

6.  Number  of  bacteria  according  to  the  plate  method  (aerobic). 

7.  Number  of  anaerobic  bacteria  in  the  soil. 

8.  Number  of  spore-forming  bacteria  in  the  soil. 

9.  Number  of  thermophilic  bacteria. 

10.  Effect  of  season  of  the  year  on  number  of  microorganisms. 

11.  Effect  of  plant  roots  on  number  Of  microorganisms. 

12.  Effect  of  depth  of  soil  on  number  of  microorganisms. 

13.  Effect  of  manures  on  number  of  microorganisms. 

14.  Dilution  method  for  determining  the  number  of  specific  physiological 
groups  of  bacteria. 

15.  Direct  microscopic  examination  of  soil. 

16.  Winogradsky's  method  of  microscopic  analysis  of  soil. 

17.  Determination   of  numbers   of  nematodes    (and  other  worms)   and 
insects  in  soil. 

87 


88  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

C.  Nitrogen-fixing  bacteria  and  nitrogen  fixation  in  soil : 

18.  The  isolation  of  bacteria  from  the  root  nodules  of  various  leguminous 
plants. 

19.  Cultural  characteristics  of  root-nodule  bacteria. 

20.  The  formation  of  root  nodules  in  agar  and  sand  cultures. 

21.  Artificial  cultures  for  the  inoculation  of  leguminous  plants. 

22.  The  structure  of  root  nodules  of  leguminous  plants. 

23.  Effect  of  root-nodule  bacteria  on  the  growth  and  the  nitrogen  content 
of  alfalfa. 

24.  Direct  method  for  demonstrating  the  occurrence  of  Azotobacter  in 
soil. 

25.  Isolation  of  Azotobacter  from  various  soils. 

26.  Use  of  silica-gel  plate  for  the  isolation  of  specific  bacteria. 

27.  Nitrogen  fixation  by  pure  cultures  of  Azotobacter. 

28.  Effect  of  variation  in  carbohydrates  on  the  growth  of  Azotobacter. 

29.  Anaerobic   nitrogen   fixation    (Clostridium  pasteurianum  and  related 
organisms).     Spore  stain- Dorner  modified). 

30.  Isolation  of  anaerobic  nitrogen-fixing  organisms. 

31.  Nitrogen-fixing  capacity  of  soil  (Winogradsky). 

32.  Influence  of  nitrate  on  the  fixation  of  nitrogen. 

33.  Effect  of  a  soluble  carbohydrate  on  nitrogen  assimilation. 

D.  Denitrifying  bacteria: 

34.  Isolation  of  denitrifying  bacteria. 

35.  Denitrification  by  pure  cultures  of  bacteria. 

36.  Denitrification  in  soil. 

E.  Nitrification  experiments: 

37.  Nitrification  in  impure  cultures. 

38.  Nitrification  in  liquid  cultures  (quantitative). 

39.  Isolation  of  nitrifying  organisms. 

40.  Nitrification  of  various  substances. 

F.  Urea  and  protein  decomposition: 

41.  The  decomposition  of  urea  with  the  production  of  ammonia. 

42.  Isolation  of  urea-decomposing  organisms. 

43.  Ammonia  production  from  various  substances  in  soil. 

44.  Decomposition  of  an  amino  acid  and  a  protein  by  Bac.  cereus  and 
Bad.  fluorescens. 

G.  Sulphate-reducing  and  sulphur-oxidizing  bacteria. 

45.  Reduction  of  sulphates  with  the  formation  of  hydrogen  sulphide. 

46.  Isolation  of  hydrogen  sulphide-forming  microorganisms. 

47.  Crude  cultures  of  higher  sulphur  bacteria. 

48.  Oxidation  of  sulphur  and  the  dissolving  of  rock  phosphate. 

49.  Isolation  of  pure  cultures  of  higher  sulphur  bacteria. 

50.  Growth  and  isolation  of  Thiobacillus  thioparus. 

51.  Growth  of  Thiobacillus  thiooxidans  in  liquid  medium. 
H.  Iron  bacteria: 

52.  Iron-precipitating  bacteria. 

63.  Iron  bacteria  from  drinking  water. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL         89 

/.  Cellulose-decomposing  bacteria: 

54.  Anaerobic  cellulose  decomposition  in  impure  cultures  (liquid). 

55.  Number  of  aerobic  cellulose-decomposing  bacteria  in  soil. 

56.  The  thermophilic  fermentation  of  cellulose. 

57.  Isolation  of  cellulose-decomposing  bacteria. 

58.  The  evolution  of  carbon  dioxide  from  soil. 

A  SUGGESTED  LIST  OF  APPARATUS  FOR  ONE  STUDENT 

The  following  apparatus  should  be  in  each  desk.     Any  omission  must  be 
reported  to  the  instructor  at  once. 

1  Bunsen  burner  and  tubing 

4  Wire  baskets 

2  Metal  cups 
2  Funnels 

5  Erlenmeyer  flasks  (150  cubic  centimeters) 

5  Glass  tumblers 

10  Pipettes  (1  cubic  centimeter) 
2  Pipettes  (10  cubic  centimeters) 
1  Graduated  pipette  (5  cubic  centimeters) 

1  Thermometer 

2  Platinum  needles 

20  Object  slides  (not  returnable) 

1   Hanging-drop  slide 
50  Cover  glasses  (not  returnable) 

1  Aluminum  weighing  dish 

6  Evaporating  dishes 
1  Test  plate 

1   Wash  bottle 

Filter  paper  (8-inch) 
1  Forceps  (steel) 
1  Spatula 
1  SHde  box 
1  Test-tube  brush 
1  Towel 

1   Box  of  matches 
1   Box  of  labels 
1  Wax  pencil 
1   Microscope  No 

(No.  ...^. 

Objectives  -j  No 

I  No 

1  Microscope  lamp 

LABORATORY  RULES 

Read  carefully  the  following  rules: 

Before  pouring  plates  or  making  transfers,  wash  off  the  desk 
with  a  1 : 1,000  mercuric  chloride  solution. 


90  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Mercuric  Chloride. — A  stock  solution  is  prepared  and  diluted 
to  the  desired  strength. 

Add  1  part  of  mercuric  chloride  to  2.5  parts  of  commercial 
hydrochloric  acid  (40  per  cent  HgCU  in  HCl).  To  prepare 
a  1:1,000  solution,  take  2.5  cubic  centimeters  of  the  stock  solu- 
tion and  dilute  to  1,000  cubic  centimeters.  Color  with  dye  and 
label  ''poison." 

Transferring  Cultures. — Hold  the  test-tube  cultures  to  be 
transferred  as  nearly  in  a  horizontal  position  as  possible.  Avoid 
opening  cultures  in  a  current  of  air. 

All  cultures  are  to  be  grown  in  the  incubator  at  28°C.  unless 
otherwise  stated. 

Care  of  Apparatus. — After  using  balances,  always  return 
weights  to  their  proper  places.  Do  not  leave  any  dust  or  dirt 
on  balances. 

All  solid  material,  as  soil,  agar,  cotton  or  filter  paper,  must  be 
emptied  into  waste  jars  and  not  into  the  sinks. 

Soil  should  not  be  sieved  in  the  laboratory.  The  greenhouse 
or  potting  room  may  be  used  for  this  purpose. 

At  the  end  of  the  laboratory  period  return  all  stock  bottles 
and  chemicals  to  their  proper  places  on  the  shelves.  See  that 
all  apparatus  is  replaced  in  the  lockers  and  that  all  gas  burners 
are  shut  off.     Wipe  off  the  table  top  before  leaving. 

Anything  left  on  the  desk  will  be  collected  after  the  laboratory 
period  and  returned  to  the  store  room. 

Cleaning  Glassware. — All  glassware  must  be  thoroughly  cleaned 
before  it  is  ready  to  use.  Test  tubes,  Petri  dishes,  flasks,  and 
similar  glassware  should  be  boiled  in  a  5-per  cent  soda  solution  or 
washed  in  hot  soapsuds  until  free  from  organic  matter.  When  it 
is  desirable  to  use  very  clean  glassware,  immerse  for  10  minutes 
or  longer  if  possible  in  the  dichromate  solution. 

Potassium  (K2Cr207)  or  sodium  dichromate  (Na2Cr2- 

Ot) 40  gm. 

Water 150  cc. 

Sulphuric  acid  (H2SO4) 230  cc. 

Note. — Dissolve  the  dichromate  in  warm  water  and,  when  cool,  add 
slowly  concentrated  sulphuric  acid.  If  properly  prepared,  the  liquid  should 
be  thick,  with  small  crystals.  It  may  be  used  repeatedly,  provided  the 
crystals  are  present. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL         91 

After  removing  glassware  from  the  cleaning  solution  rinse 
thoroughly  in  distilled  water. 

Dirty  cover  glasses  and  slides  may  be  treated  in  the  same 
manner.  Drop  these,  one  at  a  time,  into  the  dichromate  mixture 
and  allow  to  remain  for  several  hours.  Remove  from  this  solu- 
tion, wash,  and  wipe  with  a  soft,  clean  cloth. 

A  simple  and  more  rapid  method,  suitable  for  general  work, 
is  to  rub  the  shdes  with  moist  Bon  Ami,  and  when  dry  pohsh 
them  with  a  clean  cloth. 

In  order  to  remove  fat,  pass  the  cover  slips  through  a  flame. 
Where  it  is  desirable  to  have  very  clean  slides  and  cover  slips, 
it  is  well  to  heat  them  in  water  and  then  in  50  per  cent  sulphuric 
acid.  After  rinsing  in  distilled  water,  wash  in  alcohol  and  wipe 
with  a  clean  cloth.     These  should  be  kept  in  a  clean,  covered  dish. 

A  Black  Finish  for  Table  Tops 
Method 'I 
The  following  solutions  are  required: 

A.  Copper  sulphate 125  gm. 

Potassium  chlorate 125  gm. 

Water 1,000  cc. 

Boil  until  salts  are  dissolved. 

B.  Aniline  hydrochloride 150  gm. 

Water 1,000  cc. 

Or,  if  more  readily  procurable: 

Aniline  oil 120  gm. 

Hydrochloric  acid 180  gm. 

Water 1,000  cc. 

By  means  of  a  brush  apply  two  coats  of  solution  A  while  hot, 
the  second  coat  as  soon  as  the  first  is  dry.  Then  apply  two 
coats  of  solution  B  and  allow  the  wood  to  thoroughly  dry.  A 
coat  of  raw  linseed  oil  is  next  apphed.  It  is  best  to  use  a  cloth 
instead  of  a  brush  so  as  to  get  only  a  very  thin  coat  of  oil.  The 
desired  amount  of  polish  is  now  given  the  wood  by  rubbing  in 
the  oil.  In  the  treatment  with  the  oil  the  deep  black  color  is 
partially  brought  out,  although  this  does  not  uniformly  appear 
until  the  table  has  been  thoroughly  washed  with  hot  soap  suds. 
This  takes  out  the  superfluous  chemicals. 

The  finish  thus  secured  is  an  ebony  black  which  is  permanent 
and  very  highly  resistant  to  the  action  of  chemicals,  such  as 
acids  and  alkahes,  even  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  having  httle 
or  no  effect  if  quickly  washed  off. 


92  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Method  II 
The  following  solutions  are  required: 

A.  Aniline 120  gm. 

Hydrochloric  acid  (commercial) 180  gm. 

Water 1,000  cc. 

B.  Sodium  dichromate 120  gm. 

Hydrochloric  acid 100  gm. 

Water 1,000  cc. 

Solution  A  should  be  applied  with  a  brush  to  the  fresh  smooth 
surface  and  allowed  to  dry  overnight.  The  color  will  turn 
bright  yellow.  Solution  B  should  then  be  spread  on  the  wood, 
which  will  turn  dark  and  be  very  streaky  at  first.  After  this 
second  coat  dries  the  surface  should  be  rubbed  with  vaseline, 
motor  oil,  or  paraffin.     Vaseline  seems  to  be  preferable. 

GENERAL  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  SOIL  POPULATION 

Every  particle  of  soil  harbors  numerous  microorganisms,  which 
vary  in  kind,  nature  of  nutrition  and,  therefore  in  the  biochemical 
processes  which  they  bring  about.  Although  one  set  of  condi- 
tions may  favor  the  activities  of  one  group  of  organisms  in  prefer- 
ence to  others,  no  soil  is  known  in  which  only  a  single  species  of  one 
organism  is  found.  The  actual  number  of  cells  may  vary  from  a 
few  hundred  thousands  per  gram  in  certain  very  poor  sandy  soils 
and  in  bog  soil  to  many  billions  in  good  garden,  field,  and  green- 
house soils.  The  number  of  species  varies  from  a  few  types  of 
fungi  and  bacteria  in  marshy  lands  or  in  very  acid  forest  soils  to 
thousands  of  species  in  the  garden  and  field  soils. 

The  soil  population  can  be  readily  divided  into  the  following  5 
groups : 

1.  Bacteria. — This  group  is  usually  the  most  numerous  in  the 
soil,  both  in  the  total  number  of  cells  and  in  the  number  of  species. 
Morphologically,  they  comprise  the  cocci,  non-spore  forming 
and  spore-forming  bacteria  and  spirilla.  Some  bacteria,  forming 
thin,  long,  flexuous,  undulating  cells  are  often  referred  to  as  Spiro- 
chsetes,  but  these  soil  forms  belong  to  the  bacteria  rather  than 
to  the  protozoa.  These  numerous  soil  bacteria  vary  consider- 
ably in  their  nutrition  and  in  their  response  to  environmen- 
tal conditions.  We  have  aerobic  and  anaerobic  forms,  auto- 
trophic and  heterotrophic  bacteria,  those  that  are  resistant  to 
acids  and  those  that  do  not  grow  at  a  pH  less  than  6.0.     The 


THE  STUDY  CF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL         93 

nature  and  abundance  of  the  various  types  of  bacteria  thus 
depends  both  upon  the  available  nutrients  present  in  the  soil  and 
upon  the  soil  environmental  conditions,  such  as  reaction,  aeration, 
moisture  content,  abundance  of  organic  matter,  etc.  The  plate 
method  of  counting  gives  only  a  fraction  of  the  total  number  of 
bacteria  present  in  a  given  soil.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that 
the  many  types  of  bacteria  such  as  the  autotrophic,  anaerobic, 
nitrogen-fixing  ones,  etc.,  do  not  develop  on  the  common  media. 

2.  Fungi. — Although  the  bacteria  from  the  largest  group  of 
organisms  in  most  soils,  the  fungi  may  be  present  in  considerably 
greater  bulk  in  some  soils,  such  as  acid  forest  soils  or  heavily 
manured,  acid  garden  and  field  soils.  This  is  due  to  the  consid- 
erable difference  in  size  of  a  piece  of  fungus  mycelium  and  a 
bacterial  cell.  The  abundance  of  fungi  in  the  soil  can  be  deter- 
mined both  by  the  plate  and  the  microscopic  methods.  A  colony 
may  develop  either  from  a  spore  or  from  a  piece  of  mycelium. 
Spore  fungi,  like  most  Hyphomycetes,  form  a  mycelium  which 
readily  breaks  up  into  fragments.  Others,  like  the  Phycomycetes 
form  a  unicellular  mycelium.  In  the  case  of  these  organisms,  the 
number  of  colonies  developing  on  a  plate  may  be  far  from  repre- 
senting their  actual  abundance.  The  fungi  are  represented  in  the 
soil  by  (a)  the  filamentous  fungi  or  molds,  (b)  the  actinomyces,  or 
ray  fungi,  and  (c)  the  yeasts.  In  acid  forest  soils,  there  is  an 
extensive  development  of  fungus  mycelium,  belonging  to  Basidio- 
mycetes  and  other  fungi,  which  do  not  readily  form  any  fruiting 
bodies.  Many  of  these  produce  '^mycorrhiza"  with  the  roots  of 
various  trees,  and  a  number  of  other  perennial  and  annual  plants. 
The  relative  abundance  of  these  fungi  can  be  obtained  only  by  the 
aid  of  the  microscope. 

3.  Algae. — The  chlorophyll-bearing  microscopic  plants  do  not 
need  any  carbon  compounds  as  sources  of  energy.  They  obtain 
from  the  soil  only  nitrogen  and  minerals  while  the  carbon  is 
derived  from  the  CO2  of  the  atmosphere,  using  photosynthetic 
energy.  The  algae  are  represented  in  the  soil  by  the  (a)  Cyano- 
phycese,  or  blue-greens,  (h)  Chlorophycese,  or  grass-greens,  (c)  and 
Diatomaceae,  or  diatoms.  Many  of  the  algae  are  able  to  live  at 
lower  depths  of  soil  and  are  capable  of  obtaining  their  carbon 
and  energy  from  complex  organic  compounds.  The  number 
of  algae  in  the  soil  is  best  determined  by  the  dilution  method. 


94 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


4.  Protozoa. — Many  of  these  organisms  feed  upon  bacteria, 
and  their  development  depends  upon  the  abundance  of  bacteria. 
Some  of  the  protozoa,  hke  the  ciUates  and  amoebae,  are  large  in 
size,  and  they  may  form  a  considerable  quantity  of  living  or 
recently  living  protoplasm  in  the  soil.  The  protozoa  are  repre- 
sented in  the  soil  by  the  (a)  flagellates,  (b)  amoebde,  and  (c)  ciliates 
which  are  usually  less  numerous  than  the  other  two  groups. 

5.  Invertebrate  Population  of  Soil,  Non-protozoan  in  Nature. — 
This  group  is  represented  in  the  soil  by  the  (a)  Nematodes,  or 
round  worms,  which  may  be  present  in  hundreds  of  millions  per 
acre  of  soil,  (b)  Rotifers  or  wheel  animalcules,  (c)  Turbellarians, 
or  flat  worms,  (d)  Trematodes,  or  flukes,  (e)  AnneUds  or  seg- 
mented worms,  including  the  earthworms,  (/)  Arachnids,  includ- 
ing the  mites,  ticks,  and  spiders,  (g)  Myriapodes,  (h)  insects,  etc. 

The  relative  abundance  of  these  organisms  per  gram  of  soil 
can  be  shown  as  follows : 


Approximate 

Number  of 

Microorganisms  in  Soil 

Numbers, 

plate 

method  in 

1  gram 

Numbers, 

microscopic 

method  in  1 

gram 

Approximate  size, 
in  microns 

Bacteria : 

Minimum 

100,000 
100,000,000 

1,000 
20,000,000 

0 
40,000,000 

a  few 
500,000 

10,000 
2,000,000 

500,000,000 

10,000,000 
10,000,000,000 

a  few 
50,000,000 

0.3-2X0. 4-10 

Maximum 

Fungi : 

Minimum 

3-10  X  3-100 

Maximum 

Actinomyces : 

A/Tinirniim 

0.5-2.0X0. 5-50 

Maximum 

AlgjE: 

Minimum 

1.5  X  2-50? 

Maximum 

Protozoa : 

A/Tini  mnm 

2-10  X  5-200 

Maximum 

Invertebrates   (non-pro- 
tozoan) per  acre,  up  to . . 

100  to  2,000 

THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL         95 

The  microorganisms  are  responsible  for  the  various  biochemical 
processes  going  on  constantly  in  the  soil  and  which  lead  to  the 
liberation  of  nutrients  essential  for  the  growth  of  higher  plants. 
These  nutrients  include  the  carbon,  as  carbon  dioxide,  the 
nitrogen  as  ammonia  and  nitrate,  the  minerals,  especially 
phosphorus  and  potassium.  The  following  exercises  are  planned 
to  show  how  the  microorganisms  liberate  those  nutrients,  as  well 
as  the  nature  of  the  organisms  themselves  and  methods  of 
study. 

MICROSCOPIC  EXAMINATIONS  OF  MICROORGANISMS 

Exercise  1 
Examination  of  Living  Microorganisms  in  Hanging  Drops 

Place  a  small  drop  of  the  liquid  to  be  examined  in  the  center 
of  a  cover  glass  without  spreading.  Smear  vaseline  around 
the  concavity  of  a  hollow-ground  slide  and  invert  this  slide  over 
the  cover  glass  with  the  drop  so  that  the  cover  glass  adheres 
to  the  slide.  Turn  over  the  sHde  and  see  that  the  drop  does  not 
touch  the  sHde.  Examine  the  hanging  drop  with  a  low-  and  then 
with  a  high-power  objective.  To  secure  the  best  results  reduce 
the  illumination.  The  addition  of  a  small  amount  of  nigrosin 
(saturated  aqueous  solution  of  nigrosin  B)  to  the  hanging  drop 
makes  the  bacteria  stand  out  as  clear  spots  in  a  dark  background. 
It  is  advisable  to  focus  on  the  edge  of  this  drop. 

While  this  method  of  examination  is  primarily  for  detecting 
motihty  and  Brownian  movement,  it  is  useful  in  a  study  of  general 
morphology. 

Examine:  1.  Hay  infusion. 

2.  Pure  culture  of  yeasts  and  bacteria. 

Exercise  2 

A.  Examination  of  Bacteria  in  Congo  Red  or  Nigrosin 
Preparations 

This  method  of  examination  as  described  below  has  many 
advantages;  it  is  rapid  and  does  not  alter  the  size  of  the  organisms. 
It  is  especially  useful  for  liquid  cultures.  The  bacteria  appear  as 
clear  spots  in  a  dark  background.  If  Congo  red  is  used  the  dead 
cells  appear  as  faintly  colored,  the  living  as  colorless.     Because 


96  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

of  contamination  which  may  be  present  in  the  dye  solutions  it  is 
always  well  to  mount  a  drop  of  the  uninoculated  dye  on  the  same 
slide. 

Examine:  Cultures  of  bacteria  from  hay  infusion,  B.  suhtilis 
or  B.  mesentericiis. 

1.  Congo  Red  for  Negative  Mounts  : 

(For  differentiating  living  and  dead  bacteria.) 
(a)  Place  a  drop  of  2-per  cent  aqueous  Congo  red  solution  (free 
of  bacteria)  on  a  clean  glass  slide. 

(6)  Mix  with  it  a  loopful  of  the  bacterial  culture. 

(c)  Allow  it  to  dry  thoroughly  in  air  10  minutes  or  more. 

(d)  Flood  with  acid-alcohol  (1-  or  2-per  cent  HCl).  This 
changes  the  color  to  blue  and  fixes  the  film. 

(e)  Dry  without  washing  and  examine  in  oil,  with  or  without 
cover  glass.     Living  cells  appear  unstained- white  against  blue. 

Unless  preserved  with  oil  or  balsam  the  preparations  fade  rapidly. 

This  method  of  preparing  negative  mounts  is  recommended  for 
root-nodule  bacteria.  The  active  living  cells  are  negative  while 
the  dead  cells  are  more  or  less  positive. 

2.  Nigrosin  for  Negative  Mounts : 

(a)  Place  a  loopful  of  culture  on  a  clean  glass  slide,  spread,  and 
allow  it  to  air  dry. 

(b)  Spread  thinly  over  the  smear  a  loopful  of  saturated  aqueous 
solution  of  nigrosin  B.  Spread  either  with  the  wire  loop  or  with 
a  glass  slide  (as  for  blood  smears).  Dry  and  examine  in  oil,  or 
mount  in  Canada  balsam. 

By  the  use  of  nigrosin  it  is  possible  to  examine  organisms 
unstained.  There  are  many  points  in  favor  of  this  method, 
e.g.,  the  organisms  do  not  shrink  or  change  their  form. 

B.   Examination  of  Yeasts  and  Yeast  Spores  in  Erythrosin  or  Rose 
Bengal  Preparations 

In  a  drop  of  sterile  water  on  a  glass  slide,  mix  a  small  amount  of 
the  yeast  culture. 

Add  a  large  loop  of  Erythrosin  or  Rose  Bengal  (0.5  gram  in  100 
cubic  centimeters  of  water).  The  dead  cells  stain  a  deep  pink 
while  the  living  cells  remain  colorless. 

To  prevent  evaporation  make  a  ring  of  vaseline  around  the 
edge  of  the  drop  culture  and  place  cover  slip  over  the  top. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL         97 

Examine  under  high-dry  and  oil-immersion  lenses.  Make 
drawings. 

METHODS   FOR    COUNTING    NUMBERS    OF    MICROORGANISMS 

Directions  for  Drawing  Soil  Samples. — Samples  from  the  sur- 
face to  1  foot  deep  may  be  taken  as  follows:  Remove  the  coarse 
surface  debris  and  sink  a  metal  cylinder  or  soil  sampler  to  the 
desired  depth.  Samples  of  surface  soil  may  be  taken  with  a 
sterile  spatula.  Draw  several  samples  and  empty  into  sterilized 
paper  bags  or  other  vessels.  Mix  and  pulverize  the  sample.  This 
may  be  done  with  a  sterile  spatula  upon  a  large  piece  of  sterile 
paper.  From  the  well-mixed  sample  remove  a  representative 
portion  for  dilution,  and  at  the  same  time  make  a  moisture 
determination. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  secure  accurate  samples  from  various 
depths,  it  is  well  to  dig  a  ditch  to  the  desired  depth.  By  means 
of  a  sterile  trowel,  representative  samples  may  be  drawn  from 
the  sides  of  the  ditch.  In  this  way  outside  contamination  is 
largely  prevented. 

In  order  to  reduce  the  error  common  to  determinations  of  this 
character,  it  is  well  to  use  a  large  sample  of  soil.  Balances 
sensitive  to  10  milligrams  are  satisfactory  for  this  work. 

Exercise  3 

NUMBEK    OF    AlG^    IN    SoiL    ACCORDING    TO    DILUTION    METHOD 

Add  50  grams  of  soil  to  500  cubic  centimeters  of  sterile 
water  and  shake  vigorously  for  5  minutes. 

After  the  coarse  particles  have  settled,  dilute  as  follows: 

(a)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  soil  suspension  to  90  cubic 
centimeters  of  sterile  water,  giving  a  dilution  of  1 :  100. 

(5)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (a)  to  90  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sterile  water,  giving  a  dilution  of  1:1,000.  If  the  soil 
is  rich  it  is  well  to  increase  the  dilutions. 

Inoculate  one  flask  of  algal  medium  (Medium  42  and  43)  with 
1  cubic  centimeter  of  each  of  the  above  dilutions. 

The  cultures  should  be  kept  near  a  window.  Note  when  green 
color  appears,  usually  30  to  90  days.     Examine  in  wet  mounts. 

Calculate  the  number  of  algae  in  1  gram  of  soil. 


98  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Exercise  4 
Number  of  Protozoa  according  to  the  Dilution  Method 

Add  50  grams  of  surface  soil  to  500  cubic  centimeters  of  sterile 
water,  as  directed  in  the  preceding  exercise. 

After   the    coarse   particles   have    settled,    dilute    as   follows: 

(a)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  the  soil  suspension  to  90  cubic 
centimeters  of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:100. 

(6)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (a)  to  90  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:1,000. 

(c)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (b)  to  90  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:10,000. 

(d)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (c)  to  90  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:100,000. 

Inoculate  duplicate  tubes  containing  liquid  media,  using  hay- 
extract  (Medium  38),  soil  extract  (Medium  40),  or  any  medium 
adapted  to  protozoa.  Nutrient  agar  placed  in  dishes  may  also 
be  used. 

Incubate  the  protozoan  cultures  at  room  temperature. 

At  intervals  of  2  days  each,  make  a  microscopic  examination 
of  the  cultures.  Since  the  protozoa  are  usually  larger  than  bac- 
teria— the  16  millimeters,  or  two-thirds,  and  4  millimeters,  or 
one-sixth  objectives  will  be  found  desirable. 

By  means  of  a  large-mouthed  pipette  or  loop,  transfer  a  small 
portion  of  the  protozoan  culture  to  a  slide  and  examine.  A  wet 
or  hanging-drop  mount  may  be  used.  In  certain  cases  the  small 
flagellates  become  so  numerous  that  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish 
between  the  bacteria  and  protozoa. 

If  it  is  desired  to  differentiate  between  the  number  of  vege- 
tative cells  of  protozoa  and  number  of  cysts,  another  50  grams  of 
soil  maybe  treated  with  200  cubic  centimeters  of  a  2  per  cent  solu- 
tion of  hydrochloric  acid  and  allowed  to  stand  over  night.  The 
next  morning  300  cubic  centimeters  of  water  are  added  and  dilu- 
tions made  as  before.  The  treatment  with  acid  results  in  the 
destruction  of  the  vegetative  cells  and  thus  the  number  of 
protozoan  cysts  may  be  obtained. 

Exercise  5 
Number  of  Fungi  according  to  the  Plate  Method 

Add  50  grams  of  soil  to  500  cubic  centimeters  of  sterile  water. 
Shake  vigorously  for  5  minutes. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL         99 

After  the  coarse  particles  have  settled,  dilute  as  follows: 

(a)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  soil  suspension  to  90  cubic 
centimeters  of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:100. 

(6)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (a)  to  90  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:1,000. 

(c)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (b)  to  90  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sterile  water;  dilution  1:10,000. 

{d)  Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  dilution  (c)  to  40  cubic  centi- 
meters of  water;  dilution  1:50,000. 

From  dilutions  (6),  (c),  and  (d),  of  1:1,000,  1:10,000  and 
1:50,000,  pour  plates  in  triplicate. 

Add  to  each  plate  about  10  cubic  centimeters  of  the  peptone- 
sucrose-agar,  Medium  18,  melted  and  cooled  to  40°C. 

Incubate  at  28°C.  and  count  after  2  and  4  days. 

Exercise  6 
Number  of  Bacteria  according  to  the  Plate  Method  (.erobic) 

Weigh  50  to  100  grams  of  soil  on  a  piece  of  paper  or  scoop. 
Transfer  the  soil  to  a  500-  or  1,000-cubic  centimeters  sterile 
water  blank. 

Five  hundred  cubic  centimeters  of  water  in  a  750-cubic  centi- 
meter Erlenmeyer  flask  allows  ample  space  for  shaking  (tap. 
water  may  be  used).  For  ordinary  work,  provided  the  blanks  are 
not  stored  for  a  long  time,  sterilization  of  the  water  blanks  for 
30  minutes  in  the  steamer  will  be  sufficient  for  use  in  soil  counts. 
Some  prefer  sterilization  in  the  autoclave  for  15  minutes  at  15 
pounds'  pressure. 

Shake  the  soil  suspension  vigorously  for  at  least  5  minutes  and 
allow  the  coarse  particles  to  settle. 

Add  10  cubic  centimeters  of  this  first  dilution  (equivalent  to  1 
gram  of  soil)  to  a  90-cubic  centimeter  sterile  water  blank. 

After  shaking,  add  1  cubic  centimeter  to  a  99-cubic  centimeter 
sterile  water  blank  (dilution  1:10,000). 

Transfer  1  cubic  centimeter  of  the  above  to  a  9-cubic  centi- 
meter sterile  water  blank.  As  a  rule,  this  dilution,  which 
represents  1 :  100,000  of  a  gram  of  soil  to  each  cubic  centimeter, 
is  the  one  from  which  to  pour  plates.  If  the  soil  is  very  poor, 
use  a  dilution  of  1:10,000;  if  very  rich,  1:1,000,000.  The 
number  of  dilutions  will  depend  on  the  type  of  soil.     Garden  or 


100  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

well-cultivated  soil  rich  in  organic  matter  requires  a  higher 
dilution  than  poor,  sandy  soil. 

According  to  the  total  number  of  bacteria  pour  plates  from 
the  dilutions  1:10,000,  1:100,000  and  1:1,000,000.  In  general 
dilutions  of  about  1:100,000  are  satisfactory.  About  5  to  10 
parallel  plates  for  each  dilution  should  be  poured. 

Add  to  each  plate  about  10  cubic  centimeters  of  the  agar 
medium  (Mediums  4  or  5),  melted  and  cooled  to  about  45°C. 
A  blank  plate  or  control  should  be  poured  with  each  series.  In 
case  the  medium  is  turbid,  heat  slowly,  allowing  the  deposit  to 


Fig.   5. — Colonies   of   bacteria   and   fungi   on   Petri   dish.      (Lohnis   and  Fred.) 

settle.  Use  only  the  clear  portion  of  the  medium  for  pouring 
plates. 

Immediately  after  adding  the  culture  medium,  rotate  each 
plate  to  secure  a  uniform  mixture.  Allow  agar  plates  to  harden 
on  a  level  surface  for  at  least  30  minutes. 

Agar  plates  should  be  inverted  and  incubated  under  a  moist 
chamber  at  28°C.  The  time  of  incubation  will  depend  upon  the 
microorganisms  and  the  medium.  After  5  to  10  days  count  the 
number  of  colonies  on  each  plate.  If  the  colonies  are  not  too 
thick,  it  is  well  to  dot  each  one  with  a  pen  and  ink.  When  the 
colonies  are  too  thick  to  count  easily,  use  a  hand  lens  and  count- 
ing plate. 

Reduce  all  results  to  number  of  bacteria  in  1  gram  of  dry  soil. 

Exercise  7 
Number  of  An^robic  Bacteria  in  the  Soil  (Optional) 

Prepare  a  series  of  dilutions  of  soil  in  sterile  tap  water  as 
previously  outhned.     Dilutions  equal  to  1:1,000  and  1:10,000. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       101 

One-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  the  final  dilutions  are  added 
to  15  cubic  centimeters  of  a  sterile  specific  agar  medium  {e.g., 
glucose  agar  for  Clostridium  pasteurianum,  Medium  11  or  12). 

To  remove  oxygen  from  the  medium  steam  for  about  30  minutes 
just  before  it  is  to  be  used.  Now  cool  to  45°C.  and  add  the 
dilutions  of  soil,  mixing  well  the  soil  suspension  with  the  agar  by 
rotating  the  tube.  The  deep  agar  tube  will  produce  anaerobic 
conditions  favorable  for  the  development  of  the  specific 
organisms. 

The  colonies  may  be  counted  in  the  tube,  after  a  definite 
period  of  incubation  (7  to  14  days). 

Liquid  media,  incubated  under  anaerobic  conditions  may  be 
employed. 

If  it  is  desired  to  determine  the  number  of  anaerobic  bacteria 
present  in  the  form  of  spores  and  vegetative  cells,  one  portion  of 
soil  is  suspended  in  water  and  heated  at  80°C.  for  10  minutes, 
which  results  in  the  destruction  of  the  vegetative  cells;  the 
further  dilutions  are  then  prepared  from  the  first  suspension. 

If  the  colonies  are  to  be  isolated  for  pure  culture  study,  allow 
the  agar  medium  to  solidify  and  then  pour  on  the  surface  of  the 
agar  in  the  tubes  or  plates  a  layer  of  agar  containing  0.05  per 
cent  of  HgCl2,  about  3^  centimeter  in  thickness. 

Exercise  8 
Number  of  Spore-forming  Bacteria  in  the  Soil 

Prepare  water  suspensions  of  the  soil  as  described  in  Exercise 
6,  making  dilutions  of  1 : 1,000,  1 :  10,000,  and  1 :  100,000. 

Transfer  10  cubic  centimeters  of  each  suspension  to  a  sterile 
test  tube.  Heat  these  inoculated  tubes  for  10  minutes  at  80°C. 
Cool  quickly  under  the  tap. 

Place  in  Petri  dishes  1  cubic  centimeter  portions  of  each  of  the 
unheated  and  heated  dilutions.     Use  three  plates  for  each  dilution. 

Pour  plates  of  sodium  caseinat^  or  nutrose  agar  (Medium  4) 
and  incubate  at  28°C. 

After  7  to  10  days  count  the  number  of  colonies. 

Exercise  9 
Number  of  Thermophilic  Bacteria  (Optional) 
Incubate  several  samples  of  soil  and  some  fresh  stable  manure 
at  60°C. 


102  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

In  order  to  prevent  evaporation  all  samples  must  be  kept 
in  a  moist  chamber.  A  large  glass  beaker  or  metal  container  may 
be  used.  Avoid  glass  bell  jars,  unless  of  Pyrex  glass,  since  the 
high  temperature  may  cause  them  to  crack. 

After  1  week  in  the  incubator,  prepare  agar  plates  from  the 
different   samples.     Pour  from  dilutions  1:1,000  and  1:10,000. 

The  plates  must  be  incubated  at  60°C. 

Determine  the  number  of  thermophilic  bacteria  in  1  gram  of 
soil. 

If  desirable,  a  study  may  be  carried  on  of  the  bacteria  growing 
at  low  temperatures. 

Exercise  10 
Effect  of  Season  of  Year  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

Collect  samples  of  soil  from  an  alfalfa  field,  clover  field,  blue- 
grass  field,  orchard  sod,  etc.  If  the  soil  is  frozen,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  use  a  pick  or  hatchet  in  securing  samples. 

Prepare  dilution  plates  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  samples 
reach  the  laboratory.  Unless  the  soil  is  very  rich  use  dilutions 
of  1 :  10,000  and  1 :  100,000,  about  four  or  five  parallel  plates  for 
each  dilution. 

At  the  same  time  plates  are  poured,  make  moisture  determina- 
tions of  the  soil. 

Record  outside  temperature  and  also  soil  temperature  at  the 
time  samples  are  drawn.     Read  the  directions  given  in  Exercise  6. 

Exercise  11 
Effect  of  Plant  Roots  on  Number  of  Microorganisms 

Collect  soil  samples  from  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  roots 
of  various  plants  (alfalfa,  clover,  etc.),  and  similar  samples  1  or 
2  feet  away  from  the  plants. 

Determine  the  number  of  bacteria  by  means  of  plate  counts. 

Exercise  12 

Effect  of  Depth  of  Soil  on  Number  of  Microorganisms 

The  samples  for  this  exercise  should  be  drawn  from  virgin  soil 
well  removed  from  any  source  of  contamination.  The  type  of 
soil  will  determine  to  a  certain  degree  the  number  of  organisms  at 
different  depths. 


Bacteria 

Fungi 

100,000 

1 :  10,000 

10,000  and 

1:1,000 

100,000 

1,000  and 

1:100 

10,000 

100  and 

1:10 

1,000 

THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       103 

Divide  the  sample  of  soil,  taking  one  portion  for  plate  count, 
the  other  for  moisture  determination.  For  virgin  field  soil  the 
following  dilutions  have  been  found  satisfactory. 

Take  soil  samples  and  plate  as  follows: 


(a)  Surface  soil 1 

(6)  Soil  1  foot  deep 1 

1 

(c)  Soil  2  feet  deep 1 

1 

(d)  Soil  4  feet  deep 1 

1 

Follow  the  method  given  in  previous  exercises. 
Tabulate  results. 

Exercise  13 

Effect  of  Manures  on  Number  of  Microorganisms 

Prepare  five  tumblers  or  beakers  with  100  grams  each  of  field 
soil. 

Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  Control.     No  treatment. 

(6)  Treat  with   1   per   cent  of  finely   chopped  green   clover, 

(c)  Treat  with  1  per  cent  of  well-rotted  stable  manure. 

(d)  Treat  with  1  per  cent  of  ground  wheat  or  rye  straw. 

(e)  Treat  with  1  per  cent  of  ground  wheat  or  rye  straw  and  0.1 
per  cent  (NH4)2HP04. 

Since  these  substances  contain  great  numbers  of  bacteria, 
especially  the  stable  manure,  plate  counts  should  be  made  of  the 
manures  at  the  time  the  soils  are  treated.  For  this  purpose  shake 
5-gram  portions  of  the  manures  with  5  cubic  centimeters  of 
sterile  water.  Dilute  as  given  in  the  previous  exercises.  Pour 
plates  from  the  dilutions  1:100,000  and  1:1,000,000  for  bacteria 
and  1 :  10,000  for  fungi. 

After  mixing  thoroughly  the  soil  and  manure  in  tumblers, 
raise  the  moisture  to  two-thirds  saturation. 

Cover  the  soil  with  Petri  dishes  and  incubate  at  room 
temperature. 

Determine  the  number  of  bacteria  and  fungi  after  1  and  3 
weeks. 


104  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Before  drawing  the  sample  for  counts  mix  the  contents  of  the 
tumblers  thoroughly.  This  may  be  done  with  a  sterile  spatula. 
In  the  case  of  treated  soils  plate  from  the  dilutions  1 '- 100,000  and 
1:1,000,000  for  bacteria,  and  1:10,000  and  1:100,000  for  fungi. 

Exercise  14 

Dilution  Method  for  Determining  the  Number  of  Specific 
Physiological  Groups  of  Bacteria 

This  method  is  based  upon  the  growth  of  different  groups  of 
organisms  upon  specific  substrates. 

Prepare  a  series  of  dilutions  of  soil  in  sterile  tap  water,  as  1 :  10, 
1:100,  1:10,000,  etc.,  and  add  two  1-cubic  centimeter  portions 
of  the  final  dilutions  to  flasks  or  tubes  containing  the  desired 
liquid  medium  or  to  plates  containing  the  desired  agar,  gelatin 
or  silica-gel  medium. 

For  example:  For  the  determination  of  the  number  of  Azoto- 
bacter  in  soil,  a  medium  free  from  nitrogen,  containing  mannitol 
as  a  source  of  energy  and  of  a  pH  7.0  to  9.0  is  used.  For  the 
determination  of  the  number  of  urea  bacteria,  a  medium  contain- 
ing 2  to  5  per  cent  of  urea  as  the  only  source  of  energy  and  nitro- 
gen is  used.  To  determine  the  number  of  nitrite  forming 
bacteria,  a  medium  containing  an  ammonium  salt  and  CaCOs 
or  MgCOs  is  employed. 

Exercise  15 

Direct  Microscopic  Examination  of  Soil^ 

Make  a  suspension  of  soil  in  nine  times  its  weight  of  a  0.015 
per  cent  solution  of  gelatin. 

Smear  a  drop  of  this  in  a  thin  film  on  a  slide  and  dry.  (Both 
the  amount  used  and  the  size  of  the  smear  must  be  measured  if 
the  number  of  bacteria  is  to  be  counted.) 

Immerse  for  1  to  3  minutes  in  a  40  per  cent  solution  of  acetic 
acid  or  a  O.liV  solution  of  hydrochloric  acid.  Wash  off  the  excess 
acid  quickly,  and  dry  on  a  flat  surface  over  a  boiling  water  bath. 

While  still  on  the  water  bath  cover  the  fllm  with  a  1  per  cent 
aqueous  solution  of  Rose  Bengal,  or  Erythrosin,  and  allow  it  to 
stain  for  about  1  minute. 

1  Conn,  H.  J.,  "  Stain  Technology,"  1:  125,  1926;  Soil  Sci.,  26:  257,  1928. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       105 
Exercise  16 

Winogradsky's  Method  of  Microscopic  Analysis  of  Soil 

Take  several  soil  samples,  mix  carefully,  and  powder.  Add  1 
gram  of  soil  (on  dry  basis)  to  4  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled  water 
and  shake  vigorously  for  5  minutes. 

Allow  to  settle  for  30  seconds,  then  pour  off  suspension  into 
small  tube  of  hand  centrifuge. 

Add  twice  3-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  water  to  residue, 
shake  1  minute,  allow  to  settle  for  30  seconds  and  pour  into  same 
tube  of  centrifuge.  These  manipulations  take  about  10  minutes. 
The  combined  extract  (10  cubic  centimeters)  has  in  the  meanwhile 
formed  another  sediment. 

Pipette  off  5  cubic  centimeters  of  the  supernatant  liquid 
into  another  centrifuge  tube  and  again  centrifuge  a  few  minutes; 
a  third  sediment  is  formed. 

Stained  preparations  are  then  made  of  the  three  sediments, 
of  the  centrifuged  and  non-centrifuged  suspensions. 

A  drop  is  placed  upon  a  slide,  to  cover  1  square  centimeter. 

Dry  in  oven  and  cover  with  a  small  portion  of  1  per  cent  warm 
agar  solution  or  0.1  per  cent  cold  agar  solution. 

When  the  agar  has  dried,  a  few  drops  of  absolute  alcohol  are 
added  to  fix  the  preparations. 

This  is  followed  by  staining  with  a  1  per  cent  solution  of 
Erythrosin  in  5  per  cent  phenol  solution,  allowing  the  dye  to  act 
for  5  to  15  minutes  in  the  cold  or  slight  warming,  then  washing 
a  few  seconds  in  water.  Attempt  to  differentiate  between  short 
rods  and  cocci,  bacilli,  Azotobacter  cells,  spores  and  filaments  of 
fungi,  actinomyces  filaments,  and  protozoan  cysts. 

Exercise  17 

Determination  of  Numbers  of  Nematodes  and  Other  Worms  and 

Insects  in  Soil^ 

Obtain  several  soil  sampling  tubes  consisting  of  open  cylinders 
(made  of  tin  or  galvanized  iron),  72.1  millimeters  of  internal 
diameter,  with  the  rim  of  one  end  sharpened  and  the  other  rein- 
forced.    The  area  of  the  internal  cross-section  of  the  tube  is 

1  Cobb,  N.  A.,  Bur.  PI.  Ind.,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr.,  Agr.  Tech.  Circ,  1,  1918. 


106  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

just  one-millionth  of  an  acre.  The  tubes  are  usually  6  to  9 
inches  long. 

By  means  of  this  tube,  several  samples  are  obtained  from 
different  parts  of  the  field.  The  soil  of  the  various  samples  is 
then  well  mixed  and  sifted. 

An  aliquot  portion  of  soil  is  then  suspended  in  10  to  20  vol- 
umes of  water  and  well  shaken. 

The  heavy  particles  of  soil  are  allowed  to  settle  for  5  seconds 
and  the  supernatant  liquid  immediately  poured  into  another 
vessel. 

The  residue  is  washed  two  or  three  times  with  clean  water  and 
the  washings  added  to  original  liquid. 

The  liquid  is  allowed  to  run  through  a  series  of  superimposed 
sieves,  ranging  from  16-  to  200-mesh  per  inch  and  the  residual 
material  is  washed  with  a  little  water.  When  the  liquid  flowing 
through  the  finest  sieve  shows  no  animals,  it  is  discarded. 

The  animals  are  washed  away  from  each  sieve  with  a  small 
amount  of  water  and  washings  with  animals  placed  in  a  series  of 
tubes. 

The  animals  settle  more  readily  to  the  bottom  than  the  clay. 
The  suspended  liquid  can  be  removed  after  30  minutes'  settling 
and  replaced  by  clean  water.  The  mixture  of  inorganic  particles 
and  organisms  is  then  examined  under  the  microscope. 

NITROGEN-FIXING  BACTERIA 
Exercise  18 

The  Isolation  of  Bacteria  from  the  Root  Nodules  of  Various 
Leguminous  Plants 

Thoroughly  wash  the  roots  and  nodules  of  several  leguminous 
plants  {e.g.,  red  clover,  alfalfa  or  sweet  clover,  pea  or  vetch, 
and  soybean)  under  the  tap. 

Compare  the  number,  size,  color  and  position  of  the  nodules  on 
the  roots  of  these  different  leguminous  plants. 

Select  a  large  and  firm  nodule,  cut  off,  and  immerse  for  3  to  5 
minutes  in  mercuric  chloride  solution  (1:1,000),  or  in  70  per 
cent  alcohol.  Remove  alcohol  or  mercuric  chloride  by  washing  in 
sterilized  water  and  place  the  nodule  on  a  sterile  surface  (flamed 
slide  or  Petri  dish). 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       107 

If  the  nodule  is  small,  crush,  if  the  nodule  is  large,  cut  open 
with  a  sterile  knife  and  press  out  some  of  the  inner  contents  into 
a  drop  of  sterile  water. 

Make  two  or  more  loop  transfers  from  the  first  drop  of  water  in 
a  Petri  dish  to  a  second  containing  a  few  drops  of  water. 

Repeat  these  dilutions  to  a  third  and  fourth  Petri  dish.  Pour 
Congo  red  mannitol  agar  plates  (1  liter  of  Medium  79  +  10  cubic 
centimeters  of  a  solution  of  1  gram  of  Congo  red  in  400  cubic 
centimeters  water),  agitate  until  thoroughly  mixed  and  incubate 
at  28°C. 


Fig.  6.- 


-Bacteria  from  the  nodules  of  pea  (  X  1,500),  stained  with  dilute  carbol- 
fuchsin. 


Instead  of  diluting  in  the  melted  agar,  a  suspension  of  the 
bacteria  may  be  spread  over  the  surface  of  hardened  agar. 

After  5,  10  and  20  days  examine  the  plates.  Fish  off  pure  cul- 
tures and  transfer  to  slopes  of  Brom  thymol  blue  mannitol  agar. 
Select  about  5  pure  cultures  for  each  plant.  The  root  nodule 
bacteria  usually  form  raised  moist  surface  colonies,  with  round 
edges,  at  first  glistening,  later  changing  to  an  opaque  white. 

Prepare  stained  mounts  of  the  root  nodule  bacteria. 

1.  Fuchsin  (carbol,  according  to  Ziehl).  Dilute  with  distilled 
water,  1  part  of  stain  and  9  parts  of  water. 


108  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

2.  Eryihrosin 

(a)  Erythrosin 5.0  gm. 

Alcohol  (70  per  cent) 100 . 0  cc. 

(6)   Erythrosin 1.0  gm. 

Carbolic  acid  (5  per  cent) 100 . 0  cc. 

This  stain  is  especially  recommended  for  root  nodule  bacteria. 

1.  Place  a  drop  of  the  fresh  culture  on  a  glass  slide,  tilt  the 
slide  to  allow  drop  to  spread.  Dry  the  film  in  an  oven  at  45°C. 
and  fix  in  absolute  alcohol. 

2.  After  the  alcohol  evaporates,  flood  the  mount  with  (a)  and 
allow  to  stain  for  10  minutes. 

3.  If  the  stain  is  not  deep  enough,  wash  off  this  alcohol  Ery- 
throsin and  stain  with  (6)  for  10  minutes. 

Exercise  19 
Cultural  Characteristics  of  Root  Nodule  Bacteria 

Select  three  cultures  from  the  Brom  thymol  blue  slope  cultures 
of  Exercise  18,  and  make  subcultures  on  the  various  kinds  of 
culture  media  given  below. 

(a)  Inoculate  into  litmus  milk  (Medium  90). 

(6)  Inoculate  into  bean  extract  in  shallow  layers  (Medium  82). 

(c)  Inoculate  on  potato  slopes  (Medium  91). 

{d)  Inoculate  on  slopes  of  xylose,  glucose,  and  sucrose-nitrate- 
mineral  salts  agar  to  which  Brom  thymol  blue  has  been  added 
(Medium  78). 

After  1,  2,  and  3  weeks,  at  28°C.,  record  growth  and  reaction 
changes.  In  the  milk  tubes,  note  the  effect  on  reaction  and 
serum  zone  formation.  In  the  bean  extract,  note  gum  produc- 
tion. After  4  to  5  weeks  at  28°C.,  test  for  gum.  Add  10  cubic 
centimeters  of  alcohol  (95  per  cent)  or  5  cubic  centimeters  of 
acetone  to  2.5-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  the  bean  extract 
culture.  Note  the  thickness  of  the  layer  of  gum  on  top  of  the 
liquid. 

On  potato,  note  growth  and  pigment  formation.  In  the  case  of 
Brom  thymol  blue  agar,  note  the  changes  in  reaction.  Alfalfa 
bacteria  produce  a  strong  acid  reaction  with  all  of  the  carbo- 
hydrates listed.  Clover  bacteria  produce  a  strong  acid  reaction 
from  glucose,  little  or  no  acid  from  sucrose  and  xylose.     Pea 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       109 

bacteria  produce  a  strong  acid  reaction  from  glucose,  medium 
acid  from  sucrose  and  little  or  no  acid  from  xylose.  Soybean 
and  cowpea  bacteria  produce  a  strong  alkaline  reaction  in  these 
culture  media. 

Prepare  the  following  stain: 


Barlow  Stain  for  Root  Nodule  Bacteria 

Glucose 50 . 0  gm. 

Glycerol 50 . 0  cc. 

Distilled  water 50 . 0  cc. 

Gentian  violet 3.0  gm. 

Dissolve  the  glucose  in  the  glycerol-water 
solution  by  heating  and  then  add  the 
Gentian  violet.  Bring  this  mixture  to  a 
boil  and  allow  to  cool. 

Negative  Stain. — Place  a  loopful  of  the 
gum  from  an  agar  slant  culture  on  a  clean 
slide  and  rapidly  whip  out  into  long  thin 
streaks.     Dry  in  the  air. 

Flood  with  the  Barlow  stain,  let  stand  for 
30  seconds  to  1  minute  and  wash  off  in  run- 
ning water.  Blot  off  the  excess  water  and 
dry  quickly  with  gentle  heat. 

Positive  Stain. — Prepare  the  slide  as 
above. 

Flood  the  slide  with  water  and  run  the 
stain  into  this  water  at  one  end  of  the  slide. 
As  soon  as  the  stain  has  diffused  through 
the  water,  wash  in  running  water  and  dry 
quickly. 

Exercise  20 

The  Formation  of  Root  Nodules  in 
Agar  and  Sand  Cultures 

Wash  thoroughly  the  seed  of  alfalfa, 
clover,  and  similar  plants,  which  are  to  be 
grown  in  agar  under  aseptic  conditions,  in 

,  ,.  .      ^  .         1,      .,        Fig.  7.— Growing  plants 

water   and   immerse  m  mercuric   chloride  free  of  bacteria.    A  Pyrex 
solution  (1:500)  for  2  to  3  minutes.     To  ^l^^^  cylinder  4  inches  in 

,^      ,       ,  1,       i         ,    ,1  1         .1     diameter  and  24  inches  tall 

secure  the  best  results,  treat  the  seeds  with  covered  with  a  beaker. 


110  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

mercuric  chloride  in  a  partial  vacuum.  Rinse  in  sterile 
water. 

In  the  case  of  peas,  cowpeas,  soybeans,  etc.,  which  are  to  be 
grown  in  pots  of  sterilized  sand,  the  seed  may  be  dipped  in  hot 
water  (65°C.)  for  4  minutes  to  kill  the  nodule  bacteria.  Spread 
out  and  dry  quickly  in  an  atmosphere  free  from  dust. 

Place  three  to  five  seeds  each  of  alfalfa  or  red  clover  into  a 
large  tube  containing  agar  Medium  106. 

Plant  the  peas,  soybeans,  and  related  plants,  four  or  five 
seeds,  in  half-gallon  pots  of  sand  which  has  been  sterilized  4 
hours  in  an  autoclave  at  about  110  to  115°C.  Cover  the  seed 
with  about  1  inch  of  sand  and  add  sterile  distilled  water. 

To  inoculate,  prepare  a  water  suspension  of  a  young  culture  of 
the  desired  organism  and  from  this  take  1  cubic  centimeter  for 
each  tube  or  pot. 

Peas  or  Soybeans  (Pots)  Alfalfa  or  Clover  (Tubes) 

(a)   1  and  2  uninoculated.  1,  2,  and  3,  uninoculated. 

(6)   3  and  4  inoculated  with  known  4,  5,  and  6,  inoculated  with  known 

culture.  culture. 

(c)  5  and  6  inoculated  with  an  un-  7,  8,  and  9  inoculated  with  an  un- 
known culture.  known  culture. 

{d)  7  and  8  inoculated  with  an  un-  10,    11,   and   12,  inoculated  with  an 

known  culture.  unknown  culture. 

Under  favorable  conditions,  nodules  will  begin  to  form  on  the 
clover  and  peas  in  10  to  15  days.  With  alfalfa  and  soybeans  it 
requires  about  21  to  28  days. 

Keep  cultures  in  a  greenhouse,  free  from  dirt  and  dust. 

Plants  in  open  pots  should  be  watered  from  time  to  time 
with  sterile  distilled  water.  About  once  a  week,  add  about  30 
to  40  cubic  centimeters  of  the  nitrogen-free  modified  Crone's 
solution. 

After  4  to  6  weeks  examine  for  nodules;  note  the  number, 
size,  shape,  and  location. 

Exercise  21 
Artificial  Cultures  for  the  Inoculation  of  Legumes 
Prepare  two  6-ounce  Signet  bottles  of  mannitol  agar  (Medium 
77)  about  30  cubic  centimeters  of  agar  in  each.     After  steriHza- 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL      111 

tion  allow  the  bottles  with  the  melted  medium  to  cool  in  a  sloped 
position.  When  the  agar  has  hardened  the  bottles  are  ready  for 
inoculation  with  the  proper  bacteria. 

Select  young  cultures  of  root-nodule  bacteria  of  alfalfa,  or 
clover  and  cowpea,  or  soybean  from  Exercise  13.  Inoculate  the 
surface  of  the  agar  with  three  long  streaks.  Use  a  large  loop 
which  has  been  bent  at  right  angles. 

Incubate  the  cultures  at  28°C.  or  room  temperature,  for  4  to 
10  days.  Examine  the  cultures  microscopically  (Barlow  stain) 
and  pack  for  shipping. 

Exercise  22 

The  Structure  of  Root  Nodules 

A  nodule  consists  mainly  of  a  mass  of  large,  thin-walled 
nucleated  cells  often  completely  filled  with  bacteria,  i.e.,  bac- 
teroidal  tissue.  The  action  of  the  bacteria  on  the  plant  cells 
as  well  as  the  infection  threads  may  be  seen  from  free  hand 
sections  or  better  from  paraffin  embedded  sections  cut  about  3 
to  5  microns- thick. 

A.  Free-hand  Sections. — Cut  a  cross-section  through  a  young 
pea  nodule  and  root. 

Mount  in  a  drop  of  water  and  examine. 

To  secure  a  clear  section,  immerse  it  for  2  to  5  minutes  in  a 
dilute   sodium   hypochlorite   solution   and   stain   with   safranin. 

B.  Embedded  Sections. — Select  young  nodules  from  the 
desired   plant   grown   in   quartz   sand   or   on   filter-paper   pads. 

Fix  by  immersing  for  24  hours  in  a  formol-alcohol-acetic  acid 
mixture. 

Acetic  acid  (glacial) 2 . 5  cc. 

Formalin 6 . 5  cc. 

Alcohol  (50  per  cent) 100 . 0  cc. 

Transfer  to  70  per  cent  alcohol  and  change  the  liquid  until 
there  is  no  odor  of  acetic  acid. 

Dehydrate  in  80,  90,  and  100  per  cent  alcohol,  clear  in  chloro- 
form, embed  in  paraffin,  and  cut  microtome  sections  3  to  5  microns 
thick.  In  order  to  stain  the  bacteria  and  the  infection  threads 
use  method  A  or  B. 


112 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


Method  A.  Flemming^s  Triple  Stain. — For  general  cytology 
of  the  nodule.  Vascular  system,  bacteroid  area,  shape  and 
position  of  infection  threads,  starch  grains. 

Remove  paraffin  from  the  sections  in  xylol  1  minute;  rinse  in 
95  per  cent  alcohol  1  minute. 

Stain  2  minutes  in  safranin  (saturated  solution  in  equal  parts 
of  95  per  cent  alcohol  and  anilin  water).     Rinse  in  water. 


Fig.  8.- 


-Cross-section  of  alfalfa  nodule  showing  infection  threads, 
triple  stain. 


riemming'a 


Stain  3  minutes  in  crystal  violet  (saturated  aqueous  solution). 
Rinse  in  water. 

Treat  with  Orange  G  (saturated  aqueous  solution)  from  a 
medicine  dropper.  Time  should  be  as  short  as  possible.  Rinse 
with  absolute  alcohol.  Destain  with  clove  oil  until  the  desired 
differentiation  of  infection  threads  and  bacteroid  tissue  is  reached; 
observe  under  microscope.     Rinse  quickly  in  absolute  alcohol. 

Clear  in  xylol  5  to  10  minutes. 

Mount  in  Canada  balsam. 

Method  B.  Heidenhain's  Haematoxylin. — For  bacteria  within 
infection  threads,  internal  structure  of  bacteroids. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       113 


Remove  paraffin  from  the  sections  in  xylol  1  minute;  rinse  in 
95  per  cent  alcohol  1  minute. 

Immerse  in  iron  alum  mordant  (2  per  cent  aqueous  solution) 
4  to   24  hours.     Over  night  is   convenient.     Rinse   in  water. 

Stain  in  haematoxylin^  1  to 
6  hours. 

Destain  in  the  mordant  until 
desired  differentiation  is 
reached;  observe  under 
microscope. 

Wash  in  running  water  20 
minutes  to  remove  all  iron  alum 
and  thus  prevent  fading. 

Counterstain  in  Licht  grim 
(saturated  solution  in  95  per 
cent  alcohol). 

Dehydrate  in  absolute  alco- 
hol, clear  in  xylol,  and  mount 
in  balsam. 

Exercise  23 

Effect  of  Root  Nodule  Bacteria 
ON  the  Growth  and  the  Nitro- 
gen Content  of  Alfalfa 


2 -gallon  jars 


Prepare  eight 
of  clean  sand. 

Plant  to  peas  as  follows : 

(a)  1,  2,  3,  4,  sand  uninocul- 
ated. 

(h)     5,    6,    7,    and    8,    sand 
inoculated. 

One  week  after  seeds  begin  to       Fig.  9.— Effect  of  bacteria  on  growth 
1  1    -.nrK        L--  ,.     of  sweet    peas.     Jar    on  left  not  inocu- 

germmate  add  100  cubic  centl-  i^ted.     Jar  on  right  inoculated. 

meters   per  jar  of  plant  food 

minus  nitrogen  (Crone's  Medium  106).     This  nutrient  solution 

should  be  added  at  intervals  of  every  2  weeks  or  whenever  needed. 

1  Heidenhain's  Haematoxylin.  Dissolve  5  grams  of  haematoxylin 
crystals  in  400  cubic  centimeters  of  absolute  alcohol  using  heat  if  necessary. 
Add  600  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled  water  and  allow  the  solution  to  ripen 
a  month  or  more. 


114  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

After  6  to  8  weeks  examine  for  nodules. 

When  mature,  remove  and  analyze  the  tissue  for  total  nitrogen. 

Exercise  24 

Direct  Method  for  Demonstrating  the  Occurrence  of  Azotobacter 

IN  Soil 

A.  Macroscopic  Method  (Winogradsky).^ — To  100  grams  of 
freshly  sieved  soil,  add  5  grams  of  pulverized  starch.  Mix  the 
starch  thoroughly  with  the  soil. 

Transfer  the  starch-soil  mixture  to  a  shallow  dish  and  add 
water  in  sufficient  amount  to  make  a  thick  paste  of  the  soil. 
Avoid  too  much  water. 

Divide  the  soil  paste  between  two  Petri  dishes.  Press  the  soil 
well  into  the  Petri  dishes,  and  smooth  off  the  surface  with  a 
wet  glass  slide.     Make  the  top  as  smooth  and  even  as  possible. 

Incubate  the  plates  at  28°C.  for  48  hours.  If  Azotobacter  is 
present  in  the  soil,  small  limpid  colonies  will  be  observed  on  the 
surface  of  the  plate.  Stain  these  colonies  of  organisms  for  2  to 
3  minutes  with  thionin  or  erythrosin.  Pure  cultures  may  be 
obtained  from  these  colonies  (see  Exercises  25  and  26). 

B.  Microscopic  Method. — Thoroughly  mix  0.5  gram  of  manni- 
tol  with  50  grams  of  soil.  Place  the  mixture  in  a  Petri  dish,  and 
moisten  the  soil  with  water. 

Incubate  the  plate  at  28°C.  for  48  hours. 

Make  an  erythrosin  or  thionin  stain  of  the  soil.  Azotobacter 
cells  will  frequently  be  observed. 

Anaerobic  nitrogen  fixing  organisms  (CI.  pasteurianum)  can 
be  cultivated  by  adding  0.5  gram  of  glucose  to  50  grams  of  soil 
and  mixing  thoroughly.  Divide  the  soil-glucose  mixture  between 
three    large    test    tubes    and    saturate    the    soil    with    water. 

Incubate  the  tubes  at  28°C.  and  examine  microscopically  after 
48  hours.  Examine  portions  of  the  soil  taken  from  different 
depths  in  the  tube. 

Exercise  26 
Isolation  of  Azotobacter  from  Various  Soils 

Prepare  four  small  Erlenmeyer  flasks  of  mannitol  liquid 
medium  (Medium  77),  about  20  cubic  centimeters  in  each. 
Avoid  deep  layers. 

1  WiNOGRADSKY,  S.,  Ann.  Inst.  Past.,  40:  455  (1926). 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       115 

Inoculate  with  1  or  2  grams  of  soil  and  incubate  at  28°C.  and 
note  changes  occurring  in  cultures,  film  formation,  and  color  of 
film. 

After  2  days,  examine  the  films  in  hanging-drop  or  wet  mount 
and  note  the  predominating  type  of  organism.  Also  examine 
some  of  the  surface  film  in  a  drop  of  water  mixed  with  a  drop  of 
Meissner's  or  Gram's  iodin  solution.     Prepare  stained  mounts 


Fig.  10. — Colonies  of  Azotobacter  on  mannitol  agar,  natural  size. 


with  thionin  and  carbol  erythrosin.  The  Erythrosin  stain  is 
especially  good  for  young  cultures. 

Dilute  two  loops  of  surface  film  in  a  100-cubic  centimeter 
sterile  water  blank  containing  50  grams  of  clean  sand. 

Shake  vigorously,  and  transfer  1  cubic  centimeter  to  a  second 
100-cubic  centimeter  blank,  and  so  on  to  a  third. 

From  the  second  and  third  dilution  pour  plates,  using  1  cubic 
centimeter  for  each.     Because  of  the  aerobic  nature  of  Azotobacter 


116  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

dilutions  on  the  surface  of  the  agar  offer  an  easy  and  rapid  method 
of  isolation.  Sometimes  it  is  difficult  to  separate  Azotobacter 
from  a  small  organism  known  as  Bacterium  radiobacter. 

After  4  to  6  days  examine  plates.  The  Azotobacter  colonies 
are  raised,  convex,  smooth,  white,  semi-opaque,  moist,  viscid, 
often  4  to  8  millimeters  in  diameter.  Make  transfers  to  mannitol 
agar  slants.     Stain  with  carbolated  rose  bengal  or  erythrosin. 

Note. — Instead  of  the  enrichment  liquid  culture  described  above, 
isolations  may  be  made  directly  from  the  colonies  on  soil.  Exercise  24. 

Exercise  26 

Use  of  Silica  Gel  Plate  for  Isolation  of  Specific  Bacteria 

Silica-gel  plates  are  prepared  as  described  under  culture  media 
and  dialyzed  free  from  chlorides.  A  sterile  solution  containing 
the  necessary  mineral  salts  and  the  specific  substrate  is  placed 
upon  the  surface  of  the  gel.  The  uncovered  plates  are  then 
placed  in  a  warm  place  (at  60°C.)  to  allow  the  evaporation  of 
excess  liquid,  care  being  taken  that  medium  does  not  become  too 
dry. 

The  silica  gel  is  then  inoculated  with  small  particles  of  soil. 

After  a  few  days  incubation,  growth  will  take  place  around  each 
particle  of  soil.  The  nature  of  the  organism  developing  will 
depend  upon  the  nature  of  the  medium  added  to  the  gel. 

A  mannitol  medium  free  from  combined  nitrogen  will  allow  the 
development  of  Azotobacter  under  aerobic  and  of  CI.  pasteur- 
ianum  under  anaerobic  conditions. 

A  medium  containing  cellulose  and  an  inorganic  source  of 
nitrogen  will  allow  the  development  of  Spirochseta  and  other 
cellulose  decomposing  bacteria. 

When  the  colonies  have  developed  sufficiently,  they  can  be 
transferred  to  specific  nutrient  media. 

Exercise  27 

Nitrogen  Fixation  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Azotobacter 

Prepare  four  1-liter  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  100  cubic  centi- 
meters each  of  mannitol  agar  (Medium  77).     In  place  of  the 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       111 


flasks  large  pans  or  moist  chambers  may  be  used.     The  object 
is  to  use  a  vessel  that  will  give  a  large  surface  exposure. 

After  sterilization,  inoculate  the  agar  films  with  a  pure  culture 
of  Azotobacter.  This  may  be  accomplished  by  using  1-cubic 
centimeter  transfers  from  a  suspension  in  sterile  water. 

Immediately  after  inoculation  remove  half  of  the  cultures  for 
control  analysis.     These  may  be  treated 
with  sulphuric  acid  or  sterilized. 

A  few  days  after  inoculation,  add  5  cubic 
centimeters  of  sterile  water  to  each  culture. 

Incubate  the  cultures  in  such  a  position 
that  only  a  portion  of  the  surface  will  be 
covered  with  water,  and  from  day  to  day 
rotate.     In  this  way  it  is  possible  to  get  an 

f,,  .1  ,.  J.  Fig.      11. — Azotobacter 

even  film  over  the  entire  surface.  chroococcum,  young  cui- 

About  28°C.  is  a  favorable  temperature  tures.    {Krzemieniewski.) 

for  growth. 

After  21  days,  analyze  all  of  the  cultures  for  total  nitrogen. 


Exercise  28 


Effect  of  Variation  in  Carbohydrate  on  the  Growth  of  Azotobacter 

Prepare  six  tubes  of  culture  Medium  77,  without  mannitol. 

(a)  1  and  2,  control  (without  mannitol) . 
(6)  3  and  4,  add  1  per  cent  of  mannitol. 
(c)  5  and  6,  add  1  per  cent  of  lactose. 
Inoculate    all  cultures  from  a  water 
suspension  of  a  young  culture  of  Azoto- 
bacter.    Incubate  tubes  1,  3,  and  5  in 
the  open  and  tubes  2,  4,  and  6  in  the 
anaerobic   jar.     Examine   every   2  or  3 
days  for  a  period  of  14  days. 

Record  the  growth  and  pigment  for- 
mation of  Azotobacter  on  the  various 
culture  media.  If  the  tubes  kept  under 
anaerobic  conditions  fail  to  show  a  brown  to  black  pigment 
after  2  weeks,  open  the  jar,  incubate  again  and  note  change 
in  the  color. 


Fig.  12. — Azotobacter  agile 
showing  flagella,  X  660. 
{Beijerinck.) 


118  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Exercise  29 

An^robic     Nitrogen     Fixation      (Clostridium     pasteurianum     and 
Related  Organisms) 

Prepare  four  small  flasks  (or  6-ounce  Signet  bottles)  with  150 
cubic  centimeters  of  Winogradsky's  solution  (Medium  11). 
Arrange  to  have  the  liquid  high  in  the  necks  of  the  flasks  (or 
bottles). 

As  soon  as  possible  after  sterilization  inoculate  all  of  the  flasks 
with  a  pasteurized  soil  extract.  Heat  50  grams  of  soil  with  200 
cubic  centimeters  of  water  for  15  minutes  at  80°C. 

Allow  the  coarse  particles  to  settle  and  pipette  5-cubic  centi- 
meter portions  into  each  of  the  four  flasks. 

Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  1  and  2,  controls  (sterilize  immediately,  or  add  5  cubic 
centimeters  of  sulphuric  acid.  In  order  to  avoid  too  rapid  evolu- 
tion of  carbon  dioxide,  the  sulphuric  acid  should  be  added  slowly). 

(6)  3  and  4,  cultures  of  anaerobic  bacteria.  Incubate  all  flasks 
at  28°C. 

One  week  after  incubation  examine  under  the  microscope  a 
drop  taken  from  the  lower  layers  of  the  liquid.  This  may  be  done 
by  inserting  a  pipette.  Make  a  wet  mount  using  Meissner's 
solution.  What  forms  are  seen?  Note  the  color.  Make  a 
permanent  spore  stain,  Dorner  method. 

After  21  days  transfer  the  entire  contents  to  a  Kjeldahl  flask 
and  analyze  for  total  nitrogen. 

Exercise  30 

Isolation  of  An^robic  Nitrogen-fixing  Organisms  (Clostridium 
pasteurianum  and  Related  Forms) 

From  the  impure  cultures  of  Exercise  26  or  29  make  isolation 
plates  on  agar  medium  (Medium  12). 

From  the  bottom  of  an  actively  fermenting  culture  take  1  or  2 
drops  and  spread  on  the  surface  of  the  glucose  peptone  agar  in 
Petri  dish.  Dilute  by  spreading  over  the  surface  of  at  least  three 
plates.  To  secure  the  best  results  use  Petri  dishes  with  porous 
covers. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       119 

Incubate  the  plates  under  anaerobic  conditions  (potato  jar) 
and  pick  colonies  into  Winogradsky's  liquid  medium  or  corn 
mash. 


Fig.  13. — Dorner  spore  stain  of  anaerobic  nitrogen-fixing  bacteria. 


Exercise  31 
Nitrogen-fixing  Capacity  of  Soil^ 

Large  Petri  dishes  (20  centimeters  in  diameter)  are  filled  with 
the  selective  silica  gel  medium  (see  Exercise  26)  containing  2 
grams  of  mannitol. 

The  surface  of  the  gel  in  the  plate  is  inoculated  with  1  gram  of 
soil  (on  dry  basis). 

Plates  are  incubated  at  30°C.  for  7  days. 

The  gel  in  the  plates  is  now  dried  and  contents  transferred  to 
Kjeldahl  flasks  and  total  nitrogen  determined. 


1  WiNOGRADSKY,  S.,  and  J.  ZiEMiECKA,  Ann.  Inst.  Past.,  42:  35,  1928. 


120  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Exercise  32 

Influence  of  Nitrate  on  the  Fixation  of  Nitrogen 

Prepare  eight  large  silica  plates  containing  2  grams  of  manni- 
tol  and  medium  for  fixation  of  nitrogen.     Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  1  and  2 no  nitrate. 

(6)  3  and  4 1.0  mgm.  of  nitrate  nitrogen. 

(c)  5  and  6 5.0  mgm.  of  nitrate  nitrogen. 

(d)  7  and  8 25 . 0  mgm.  of  nitrate  nitrogen. 

Inoculate    each    with    1    gram    of    good    garden    soil. 

Incubate  for  7  days  at  30°C. 

Dry  gel  and  determine  total  nitrogen. 

Tabulate  results. 

Exercise  33 
Effect  of  a  Soluble  Carbohydrate  on  Nitrogen  Assimilation 

Weigh  out  two  400-  to  500-gram  portions  of  field  or  garden 
soil  in  deep  soup  plates  or  shallow  earthenware  jars.  The  soil 
should  be  thoroughly  mixed  and  sieved. 

(a)  Control — untreated. 

(6)  Add  2  per  cent  of  mannitol,  glucose,  sucrose,  lactose,  or 
other  carbohydrates. 

Mix  the  carbohydrate  thoroughly  with  the  soil  by  means  of  a 
spatula  and  then  add  tap  water  until  the  moisture  content  of  the 
soil  is  about  two-thirds  saturation.  Do  not  attempt  to  mix  soil 
and  carbohydrate  immediately  after  the  water  is  added.  At 
intervals  of  about  2  days  add  more  water,  sufficient  to  replace 
the  loss  by  evaporation  and  incubate  at  28°C.  for  from  14  to  21 
days.  At  the  end  of  this  time  the  carbohydrate  should  be 
entirely  destroyed. 

Prepare  the  soil  for  analysis.  When  dry,  pass  it  through  a  20- 
mesh  sieve,  mix  thoroughly,  and  draw  a  small  sample  for  analysis; 
about  100  to  150  grams  is  enough.  This  smaller  sample  should 
be  pounded  in  a  mortar  until  the  entire  mass  passes  through  a 
100-mesh  sieve.  Weigh  out  from  three  to  six  portions  of  10 
grams  from  each  jar  into  800-cubic  centimeter  Kjeldahl  flasks 
and  analyze  according  to  the  Kjeldahl  method  not  to  include 
nitrates  (p.  65). 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       121 

Make  moisture  determinations  on  the  soil  at  the  time  samples 
are  taken  for  nitrogen  analysis.     Tabulate  results. 


DENITRIFYING  BACTERIA 

Exercise  34 

Isolation  of  Denitrifying  Bacteria 

Fill  three  test  tubes  about  two-thirds  full  of  asparagin  nitrate 
solution  (Medium  55). 

Inoculate  as  follows: 

(a)  Control — no  inoculation. 

(h)   Inoculate  with  approximately  0.1   gram  of  garden  soil. 

(c)  Inoculate  with  approximately  0.1  gram  of  fresh  manure. 

Incubate  at  28°C.  until  all  nitrates  have  disappeared.  The 
destruction  of  nitrates  is  generally  indicated  by  foaming. 

At  regular  intervals,  daily  if  possible,  make  qualitative  tests 
(spot  plate)  for  the  presence  of  nitrates,  nitrites,  and  ammonia. 

As  soon  as  the  nitrates  are  destroyed,  transfer  a  loopful  of  the 
old  culture  to  a  new  tube  of  asparagin  nitrate  solution.  This 
may  be  repeated  several  times,  although  a  pure  culture  is  readily 
isolated  from  the  second  transfer. 

Follow  the  same  method  of  isolation  as  given  in  the  previous 
exercises.  It  is  well  to  make  a  series  of  not  less  than  four  dilu- 
tions. Pour  plates  of  asparagin  nitrate  agar  and  incubate 
until  there  is  a  good  growth. 

Now  pick  off  several  isolated  colonies,  making  transfers  into 
tubes  of  asparagin  nitrate  solution. 

From  the  pure  culture  showing  the  most  vigorous  destruction 
of  nitrates  make  a  transfer  to  the  agar  medium.  Preserve  this 
pure  culture  for  later  study. 

Exercise  35 

Denitrification  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Bacteria 

Prepare  four  bottles,  125  cubic  centimeters  each,  of  asparagin 
nitrate  solution  (Medium  55).  Because  of  the  total  nitrogen 
analyses  to  be  made  at  the  end  of  this  experiment  it  is  well  to 
prepare  the  medium  with  great  care.     Exact  amounts  of  the 


122  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

nitrate  and  asparagin  salt,  previously  analyzed  for  total  nitrogen 
should  be  used. 

(a)  Control — not  inoculated. 

(6)  Pure  culture  of  unknown  organism  capable  of  bringing 
about  denitrification. 

(c)  Pure  culture  of  unknown  organism  capable  of  bringing 
about  denitrification. 

{d)  B.  pyocyajieus,  B.  fluorescens  liquefaciens,  or  B.  hartlehii. 

After  2  to  3  days  incubation  at  28°C.  make  qualitative  tests  of 
each  culture  for  ammonia,  nitrites,  and  nitrates.  After  7  to  10 
days  incubation  make  quantitative  determinations  of  nitrates 
and  total  nitrogen. 

Use  the  modified  Kjeldahl  method  to  include  nitrates.  For  total 
nitrogen  analysis  take  portions  of  50  cubic  centimeters  each  of 
the  cultures. 

Nitrates. — Take  10-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  the  control, 
dilute  with  100  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled  water,  and  of  this 
evaporate  10-cubic  centimeter  portions  to  dryness. 

In  the  case  of  the  inoculated  cultures  with  nitrates  present, 
take  2  samples  and  proceed  as  follows:  (a)  Evaporate  10  cubic 
centimeters  to  dryness,  and  (b)  dilute  10  cubic  centimeters  to  100 
cubic  centimeters  and  evaporate  10  cubic  centimeters  of  this 
to  dryness. 

Exercise  36 
Denitrification  in  Soil 

Prepare   eight   100-gram   samples   of   field   soil   in  tumblers. 
Add  to  each  sample  of  soil  60  milligrams  of  nitrogen  in  the 
form  of  potassium  nitrate. 
Treat  the  series  as  follows: 
(a)  1  and  2,  control  untreated. 
(6)  3  and  4,  add  2.5  grams  of  glucose. 

(c)  5  and  6,  control  untreated. 

(d)  7  and  8,  add  2.5  grams  of  glucose. 

Mix  these  materials  thoroughly  by  means  of  a  spatula. 

To  soil  portions  1  to  4,  add  sterile  water  to  bring  the  moisture 
content  to  about  one-half  saturation. 

To  soil  portions  5  to  8  add  sterile  water  to  bring  moisture  up  to 
total  saturation. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       123 

Incubate  for  two  weeks  at  28°C. 

At  the  end  of  this  time  remove  a  sample  for  nitrate  determina- 
tion and  dry  the  remainder  for  total  nitrogen  analysis.  Use  the 
modified  Kjeldahl  method  to  include  nitrates  (see  p.  67). 

From  these  results  calculate  the  percentage  of  the  nitrogen 
denitrified,  and  note  the  effect  of  excessive  moisture  and  excessive 
organic  matter  on  the  loss  of  nitrogen. 
Tabulate  results. 

NITRIFICATION 

Exercise  37 

Nitrification  in  Impure  Cultures 

A.  Nitrite  Formation  (Qualitative) 

(a)  Prepare  five  150-cubic  centimeter  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with 
20-cubic  centimeter  portions  each  of  "ammonia"  solution 
(Medium  48). 

(5)  Inoculate  two  of  the  flasks  and  incubate  at  28°C. 

1.  Add  approximately  0.1  gram  of  field  soil. 

2.  Add  approximately  0.1  gram  of  garden  soil. 

(c)  At  regular  intervals  of  7  to  10  days  remove,  with  a  sterilized 
platinum  needle  or  pipette,  1  drop  of  the  solution  from  each 
flask  and  test  as  follows : 

1.  Nitrites — Trommsdorf's  reagent. 

Place  3  drops  of  Trommsdorf's  reagent  in  a  depression  of  a 
spot  plate.  Add  1  drop  of  dilute  sulphuric  acid  (1:3).  Remove 
a  loopful  of  the  solution  to  be  tested  and  touch  to  surface  of 
reagent.     A  blue  color  indicates  the  presence  of  nitrites. 

2.  Ammonia — Nessler's  reagent. 

Place  in  a  depression  on  a  spot  plate  1  drop  of  Nessler's  solu- 
tion. Remove  a  loopful  of  the  solution  to  be  tested  and  touch  to 
surface  of  reagent.  Do  not  stir.  A  yellow-brown  color  indicates 
ammonia. 

(d)  As  soon  as  the  culture  shows  the  presence  of  nitrites  and 
absence  of  ammonia,  make  subinoculations  into  a  sterile  flask  of 
the  same  medium.  If  it  is  desired  to  study  the  nitrite  bacteria 
in  enrichment  cultures,  repeated  subinoculations  may  be  made. 

B.  Nitrate  Formation  (Qualitative). — Prepare  five  150-cubic 
centimeter  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  20-cubic  centimeter  por- 
tions each  of  nitrite  solution  (Medium  51). 


124  LABORATORY  MANAUL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Inoculate  two  of  the  flasks  and  incubate  at  28°C. 

1.  Add  approximately  0.1  gram  of  field  soil. 

2.  Add  approximately  0.1  gram  of  garden  soil. 

At  regular  intervals  of  7  to  10  days  remove,  with  a  sterilized 
platinum  needle,  1  drop  of  the  solution  from  each  flask  and  test 
as  follows: 

1.  Absence  of  nitrites — Trommsdorf's  reagent. 

2.  Presence  of  nitrates — Diphenylamine  reagent. 

Place  in  a  depression  on  a  spot  plate  a  drop  of  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid  plus  diphenylamine.  Touch  with  a  drop  of  the 
solution  to  be  tested.  A  deep-blue  color  indicates  nitrates. 
This  test  cannot  be  made  in  the  presence  of  nitrites,  chloric,  and 
selenic  acids,  ferric  chloride,  and  many  other  oxidizing  agents. 
If  the  test  for  nitrites  (Trommsdorf)  is  positive  do  not  make  this 
test. 

As  soon  as  the  culture  shows  the  presence  of  nitrates  and 
absence  of  nitrites,  make  loop  subinoculations  into  a  sterile  flask 
of  the  same  medium.  If  it  is  desirable  to  study  the  nitrate  bac- 
teria in  enrichment  cultures,  repeated  subinoculations  may  be 
made. 

Exercise  38 

Nitrification  in  Liquid  Cultures  (Quantitative) 

Prepare  two  flasks  (750-cubic  centimeter  capacity)  with 
100  cubic  centimeters  each  of  Medium  52. 

Inoculate  each  flask  with  1  cubic  centimeter  of  enrichment 
culture — ammonia  oxidizing — and  1  cubic  centimeter  of  nitrite 
oxidizing  culture. 

Incubate  the  flasks  at  28°C. 

Once  a  week  test  the  solution  for  the  oxidation  of  ammonia  and 
nitrite.  If  this  process  is  complete,  add  1  cubic  centimeter  of  a 
10  per  cent  solution  of  ammonium  sulphate.  Repeat  until  the 
oxidation  of  the  ammonium  sulphate  ceases.  If  necessary,  add  a 
small  amount  of  magnesium  carbonate  to  the  culture. 

After  the  cultures  cease  to  oxidize,  make  qualitative  tests  for 
ammonia,  nitrite,  and  nitrate.  If  nitrates  are  present,  make 
quantitative  analyses  by  the  phenoldisulphonic  method  as  given 
on  page  63. 


\ 
THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL^     125 

Exercise  39 

Isolation  of  Nitrifying  Organisms 

Prepare  eight  tubes  of  acid  sodium-potassium  silicate. 

Dilute  the  second  enrichment  cultures  of  the  nitrite  and 
nitrate  organisms  until  1  cubic  centimeter  represents  1:1,000, 
1:10,000,    1:100,000,   and   1:1,000,000  of  the  original  culture. 

Pour  the  acid  silicate  into  a  sterile  Petri  dish  with  the  culture 
dilutions;  add  the  nutrient  salts  and  enough  sodium  carbonate 
to  harden  the  silicate. 


Fig.  14. — Nitrobacter  in  liquid  culture. 

When  hard,  invert  the  plates  and  incubate  under  a  moist 
bell  jar  for  3  to  6  weeks.  The  cultures  may  also  be  streaked  on 
the  surface  of  silica  gel. 

Examine  at  weekly  intervals,  using  the  low-power  objective. 
As  soon  as  small  colonies  appear,  make  transfers  to  sterile  nitrite 
or  nitrate  solution. 

The  nitrifying  organisms  may  be  also  grown  on  washed  agar. 

Exercise  40 

Nitrification  of  Various  Substances 

Prepare  two  portions  of  soil,  500  to  700  grams  each,  in  small 
jars.     Mix  and  sieve  the  soil  well  before  using, 
(a)  Control — no  treatment. 


126  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

(b)  Add  30  milligrams  of  nitrogen  per  100  grams  of  soil  from 
(NH4)2S04,  blood  meal,  casein,  or  peptone. 

Mix  these  substances  thoroughly  with  the  soil,  add  sterile 
water  to  give  one-half  to  two-thirds  saturation,  record  weight 
and  incubate  at  28°C. 

Each  week,  weigh  and  restore  loss  of  water  by  evaporation. 

After  10  and  20  days  determine  the  nitrate  nitrogen. 

Express  the  results  as  milligrams  of  nitrate  nitrogen  in  100 
grams  of  soil;  also  as  percentages  of  the  original  substance 
nitrified. 

Tabulate  results. 

UREA  AND  PROTEIN  DECOMPOSITION 

Exercise  41 
Decomposition  of  Urea 

Prepare  three  Erlenmeyer  flasks  or  bottles,  200-cubic  centi- 
meter capacity,  with  50  cubic  centimeters  each  of  urea  solution 
(Medium  45). 

After  sterilizing,  arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  Control — not  inoculated. 

(h)  Inoculate  with  1  gram  of  soil. 

(c)  Inoculate  with  1  gram  of  fresh  manure. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  weigh  accurately  the  soil  or  manure. 

Incubate  the  cultures  at  28°C.  and  after  2  days  remove  from 
each  flask  5-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  the  solution,  with  a 
sterile  pipette,  to  a  small  Erlenmeyer  flask.  Add  about  50  cubic 
centimeters  of  distilled  water  to  the  urea  solution  and  a  few  drops 
of  methyl  red.  Determine  the  ammonia  production  by  titrating 
with  N/14:  acid. 

From  the  results  of  the  titrations,  calculate  the  amount  of 
ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  cubic  centimeters  of  the  different  urea 
solutions.  In  order  to  find  the  amount  of  ammonia  formed  by 
bacterial  action,  subtract  the  untreated  from  the  treated  series. 

Determine  the  percentage  of  urea  nitrogen  transformed  into 
ammonia  nitrogen. 

Similar  samples  may  be  drawn  after  3  or  4  days  and  the 
amount  of  ammonia  determined.     Tabulate  the  results. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       127 

Exercise  42 

Isolation  of  Specific  Urea-decomposing  Organisms 

Pour  isolation  plates  of  several  dilutions  of  the  enrichment 
cultures  of  Exercise  41.     Use  urea  agar  or  gelatin  Medium  47. 

Incubate  the  plates  at  28°C. 

Examine  the  plates  every  48  hours  for  a  period  of  10  days. 
The  urea  organisms  are  often  characterized  by  a  distinct  halo 
around  the  colonies.  Under  the  low  power  of  the  microscope  the 
halo  is  composed  of  crystals. 

Make  transfers  to  tubes  of  urea  solution  Medium  44  or  45 
and  incubate  for  two  days. 

Now  test  the  ammonia-producing  power  of  the  pure  cultures 
by  inserting  sterilized  strips  of  Nessler's  paper  or  tumeric  paper 
in  the  upper  part  of  the  tube. 

Prepare  a  stained  mount  of  these  organisms. 

Exercise  43 

Ammonia  Production  from  Various  Substances  in  Soil 

Prepare  500-gram  portions  of  soil  in  small  jars.  The  soil 
should  be  mixed  thoroughly. 

1.  Control — no  treatment. 

2.  Soil  plus  0.5  per  cent  of  blood  meal,  casein,  peptone,  alfalfa 
meal,  soybean  meal,  or  similar  substances. 

After  these  substances  are  mixed  with  the  soil  bring  the  mois- 
ture content  of  the  soil  to  two-thirds  saturation.  In  order  to 
secure  the  proper  moisture  content  it  is  necessary  to  take  into 
account  the  water-holding  capacity  of  the  added  substances. 

Incubate  at  room  temperature  and,  after  2,  5,  and  7  days, 
determine  the  ammonia  nitrogen. 

Ammonia  may  be  estimated  in  a  number  of  ways.  The 
aeration  method  is  usually  considered  the  most  accurate  although 
good  results  may  be  obtained  by  the  leaching  of  the  soil  with  a 
strong  chloride  solution  and  distilling  with  magnesium  oxide. 

Determination  of  Ammonia  Nitrogen.  ^ — Weigh  out  50  grams 
of  soil  in  a  750-cubic  centimeter  Pyrex  Erlenmeyer  flask.  Add 
500  cubic  centimeters  of  a  10  per  cent  KCl  solution  (in  case  of  neu- 
tral or  alkaline  soils  use  a  20  per  cent  KCl  solution) ;  shake  for 

1  Harper,  H.  J.,  Soil  Sci.,  18:  409,  1924. 


128  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

30  minutes  in  a  mechanical  shaker;  allow  to  settle  10  minutes 
and  filter  on  a  large  folded  filter.  Transfer  400  cubic  centi- 
meters of  filtrate  to  a  Kjeldahl  flask,  add  a  small  piece  of  paraffin 
to  prevent  foaming  and  a  little  20-mesh  limestone  to  prevent 
bumping.     Distill  with  1  gram  of  MgO. 

Exercise  44 

Decomposition  of  an  Amino  Acid  and  a  Protein  by  Bac.  oereus  and 
Bact.  fluorescens 

Prepare  1  liter  of  a  mineral  salt  solution. 

Weigh  out  3  grams  of  K2HPO4,  0.2  gram  KCl,  0.2  gram  MgS04, 
0.2  gram  NaCl,  0.1  gram  CaS04  and  0.01  gram  FeS04,  in  1,000.0 
cubic  centimeters  of  water. 

To  500  cubic  centimeters  add  5  grams  of  glycocoll  and  mark 
solution  '' Glycocoll  medium;"  the  other  500  cubic  centimeters  is 
used  for  the  casein  solution. 

Weigh  out  into  a  beaker  5  grams  of  casein,  purified  (Hammer- 
sten).  Add  about  50  cubic  centimeters  of  the  medium  and  sus- 
pend the  casein  in  it.  Then  add  4  cubic  centimeters  of  IN. 
NaOH  solution,  warm  until  casein  has  dissolved.  Filter.  Add 
casein  solution  to  the  rest  of  the  salt  solution,  make  up  to  500 
cubic  centimeters  and  mark  it  ''Casein  solution." 

Distribute  the  two  solutions  in  50-cubic  centimeter  portions  in 
250-cubic  centimeter  Erlenmeyer  flasks,  plug  with  cotton,  and 
sterilize. 

Inoculate  two  flasks  of  each  medium  with  a  pure  culture  of 
Bacillus  cereus  and  two  flasks  of  each  medium  with  a  pure  cul- 
ture of  Bacterium  fluorescens.  Leave  1  flask  of  each  as  control. 
Incubate  14  days. 

Examine  cultures  for  growth  and  determine  in  each  flask  the 
amino-acid-nitrogen,  ammonia,  and  residual  casein. 

Tabulate  results. 

SULPHATE-REDUCING  AND  SULPHUR-OXIDIZING  BACTERIA 

Exercise  45 
Reduction  of  Sulphates  by  Bacteria 
Prepare  three  small  bottles  of  sulphate  medium  (Medium  60), 
and  treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Control — uninoculated. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       129 

(b)  1  gram  of  rich  garden  soil. 

(c)  1  cubic  centimeter  of  sewage. 

Stopper  tightly  with  paraffined  corks  and  incubate  at  28°C. 
for  2  or  4  weeks. 

At  the  end  of  this  time  remove  bottles  from  incubator  and  note 
the  change  in  color  and  odor. 

Hold  over  the  open  mouth  of  the  bottle  a  small  piece  of  filter 
paper  saturated  with  a  solution  of  lead  acetate.  A  blackening 
of  the  paper  indicates  the  presence  of  hydrogen  sulphide. 

Remove  a  few  cubic  centimeters  with  a  pipette  to  a  test  tube 
or  small  Erlenmeyer  flask  and  add  a  few  drops  of  BaCU  solution. 

Compare  the  amount  of  white  precipitate  in  the  inoculated 
cultures  with  that  in  the  uninoculated  control. 

The  amount  of  hydrogen  sulphide  may  be  determined  quanti- 
tatively   by    titrating    with    iodine    and    sodium    thiosulphate. 


Exercise  46 
Isolation  of  Hydrogen  Sulphide-forming  Microorganisms 

Prepare  five  deep  tubes  of  Medium  62. 

Make  shake  cultures,  deep  tubes,  from  varying  dilutions  of  the 
enrichment  cultures  of  Exercise  45  (reduction  of  sulphates  with 
the  formation  of  H2S). 

After  the  inoculated  tubes  have  hardened,  cover  with  glycerol 
agar  to  a  depth  of  about  2.5  centimeters.  Incubate  at  28°C. 
and  note  the  formation  of  colonies.  After  5  to  10  days  these 
colonies  become  brown  to  black  in  color.  Pure  cultures  may  be 
obtained  from  these  deep  colonies  by  cutting  the  tubes  and 
transferring  the  black  colonies  to  fresh  tubes  of  Medium  62. 

Glycerol  Agar^ 

Agar,  washed 20 . 0  gm. 

Glycerol  (C3H5(OH)3) 500.0  cc. 

Distilled  water 500 . 0  cc. 

^  Dissolve  the  agar  in  the  water  by  heating  in  a  steamer,  add  the  glycerol 
and  filter. 


130  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Exercise  47 
Crude  Cultures  of  Higher  Sulphur  Bacteria 

Place  some  mud  from  ditches  or  other  bodies  of  water  in  a  large 
flask  or  cylinder  and  cover  to  a  depth  of  3  to  6  inches  with  fresh 
or  salt  water. 

Add  5  grams  of  magnesium  sulphate  and  2  grams  of  calcium 
carbonate  per  liter  of  water.  This  furnishes  a  supply  of  H2S 
due  to  the  action  of  sulphate-reducing  bacteria  present  in  the 
mud. 

Inoculate  the  solution  with  material  that  contains  the  sulphur 
bacteria,  namely  pond  scum,  submerged  plant  material,  organic 
matter  from  sulphur  springs,  etc.  H2S  may  also  be  used  in  the 
form  of  a  gas. 

Incubate  in  the  dark  for  colorless  sulphur  bacteria,  while,  for 
colored  forms,  the  cultures  are  exposed  to  transmitted  light. 
Growth  may  appear  on  surface  of  liquid,  along  walls  of  container, 
or  on  surface  of  mud. 

Concentration  of  H2S,  amount  of  mud  added  to  flasks,  purity 
of  water  used,  amount  and  nature  of  inoculum  will  all  influence 
the  type  of  organism  developing.  The  red  forms  develop  better 
under  higher  partial  pressures  of  H2S  than  the  colorless  forms. 

Exercise  48 
Isolation  of  Pure  Cultures  of  Higher  Sulphur  Bacteria 

100-cubic  centimeter  portions  of  Medium  70  are  placed  in 
250-cubic  centimeter  Erlenmeyer  flasks  and  steriUzed,  the 
ammonium  sulphate  being  steriUzed  separately  in  stock  solutions, 
then  added  to  the  rest  of  the  medium,  after  sterilization. 

Inoculate  flasks  from  enrichment  cultures  obtained  in  previous 
experiment,  using  as  little  foreign  material  as  possible. 

The  flasks  are  then  placed  under  jar  (e)  into  which  hydrogen 
sulphide  is  introduced,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1  (p.  30). 

The  sulphide  is  generated  by  the  action  of  HCl  upon  FeS  in 
(a). 

Hydrogen,  CO2,  oxygen,  or  air  may  be  introduced  from  com- 
pressed gases  (5)  in  regulated  amounts  controlled  by  manometer 
attachment  (/). 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL      131 

Agar  media  containing  CaCOa  may  be  employed  for  isola- 
tion purposes. 

Frequent  transfer  of  the  cultures  and  incubation  in  H2S 
atmosphere  will  finally  lead  to  isolation  of  pure  cultures. 

Exercise  49 
Oxidation  of  Sulphur  and  the  Dissolving  of  Rock  Phosphate 

Prepare  a  mixture  of  60  parts  good  garden  soil,  30  parts  of 
finely  ground  rock  phosphate,  and  10  parts  of  powdered  sulphur. 
Place  in  pots  or  tumblers. 

Add  enough  water  to  bring  to  60  per  cent  saturation. 

Incubate  at  25°C. 

At  the  end  of  every  week,  mix  mixture  well  and  add  enough 
water  to  keep  at  optimum. 

After  2,  7,  21,  42,  70,  and  100  days,  determine  pH  value, 
amount  of  water  soluble  sulphate,  and  phosphate.     Draw  curves. 

After  2  and  60  days,  determine  also  number  of  bacteria  and 
fungi  by  ordinary  plate  method. 

Exercise  50 
Growth  and  Isolation  of  Thiobacillus  thioparus 

Prepare  600  cubic  centimeters  of  Medium  65.  Distribute, 
in  100  cubic  centimeter  portions,  into  250  cubic  centimeter 
Erlenmeyer  flasks.     Do  not  sterilize. 

Inoculate  two  flasks  with  1-gram  portions  of  garden  soil,  two 
with  fresh  manure.     Incubate  flasks. 

Test  every  3  days  for  disappearance  of  thiosulphate,  using  a 
dilute  iodine  solution. 

The  flasks  where  the  thiosulphate  has  first  disappeared  are  used 
for  inoculation  of  two  flasks  with  fresh  medium. 

After  the  thiosulfate  has  disappeared  in  the  second  lot  of  flasks, 
examine  culture  microscopically. 

Note  bacteria  and  granules  of  precipitated  sulphur. 

Culture  is  now  plated  upon  thiosulphate  agar. 

Incubate. 

Isolate  from  the  sulphur-yellow  colonies  into  flasks  with  sterile 
liquid  medium,  in  which  the  nitrogen  salt  and  carbonate  have 
been  sterilized  separately  and  mixed  aseptically. 


132  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Exercise  61 

Growth  of  Thiobacillus  Thiooxidans  in  Liquid  Medium 

Prepare  six  flasks  of  medium  (Medium  68). 

Inoculate  two  flasks  with  1-gram  portions  of  compost  from 
Exercise  49  (100  days  old),  two  flasks  with  0.1  gram  of  same 
compost.     Two  flasks  are  left  as  controls. 

Incubate  flasks  at  25°C. 

After  7,  14,  and  30  days,  determine  pH  of  flasks. 


Fig.  15. — Thiobacillus  thiooxidans  (X  1,000). 

If  there  is  an  increase  in  acidity  in  the  inoculated  flasks  above 
the  control,  determine  sulphates  in  solution  in  all  flasks,  and 
examine  culture  microscopically. 

Repeated  transfers  of  the  culture  upon  fresh  sterile  medium  will 
result  in  a  highly  enriched  culture  of  the  organism.  Final  isola- 
tion can  be  made  by  the  use  of  the  agar  plate.  ^ 

iWaksman,  S.  a.,  Jour.  Bact.,  7:  605-608,  1922. 

IRON  BACTERIA 

Exercise  52 

Iron-precipitating  Bacteria  (Optional) 

Shake  20  grams  of  field  soil  with  200  cubic  centimeters  of 
water.     Dilute    until    1    cubic    centimeter    equals    1 :  100,000. 

Pour  plates  of  Medium  101  or  similar  formula. 

Incubate  the  plates  for  several  weeks  at  28°C. 

Note  the  precipitation  of  iron  compounds  around  certain 
colonies. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       133 


Exercise  63 
Iron  Bacteria  from  Drinking  Water 

Clean  and  sterilize  a  Berkefeld  filter. 

Connect  the  filter  to  the  city  water-supply 
and  allow  the  water  to  run  slowly  for  24  to 
48  hours. 

After  the  metal  cap  is  removed  from  the 
filter,  place  the  filter  in  a  large  beaker  of 
iron  solution  (Medium  76). 

Incubate  in  the  ice-box  or  at  about  15  to 
20°C. 

At  regular  2-day  intervals  examine  the 
deposit  on  the  sides  of  the  filter. 

If  bacteria  are  found,  test  for  iron.  Add 
a  few  drops  of  a  5  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid 
solution  and  a  4  per  cent  potassium  ferro- 
cyanide  solution.  In  the  presence  of  ferric 
salts  an  intense  blue  color  is  formed. 

In  order  to  stain  the  higher  forms  of  iron 
bacteria  it  is  well  to  remove  the  deposit  of 
iron  by  treating  with  a  5  per  cent  hydro- 
chloric acid  solution. 

CELLULOSE-DECOMPOSING   BACTERIA 
Exercise  54 

An^robic  Cellulose  Decomposition  in 
Impure    Cultures 

Fill  four  large  test  tubes  or  wide-mouthed 
deep-form  bottles  about  three-fourths  full 
of  Omeliansky's  solution  (Medium  85). 

Add  four  strips  of  filter  paper  to  each. 

Treat  as  follows:  (1)  uninoculated,  (2) 
stable  manure,  (3)  leaf  mold,  (4)  garden 
soil. 

Incubate  at  28°C. 

Examine  the  cultures  at  regular  intervals, 
taking  note  of  the  change  in  color  and  the 
structure  of  the  filter  paper. 


Fig.  16. — Fermenta- 
tion of  filter  paper  in 
Omeliansky's  solution. 


134  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

When  the  filter  paper  shows  evidences  of  disintegration,  make 
transfers  to  new  tubes  of  Omeliansky's  medium  (enrichment 
cultures). 

Exercise  65 

Number  of  Aerobic  Cellulose-decomposing  Bacteria  in  Soil^ 

Prepare  a  series  of  medium-sized  test  tubes  containing  5  cubic 
centimeters  of  Medium  85  (the  CaCOa  may  be  left  out  and  a 
trace  of  FeS04  introduced)  and  a  strip  of 
paper.     Part  of  the  paper  should  protrude 
above  the  surface  of  medium. 

Prepare  a  series  of  soil  dilutions  (1 :  10, 
1:100,  1:1,000)  and  inoculate  1  cubic 
centimeter  of  each  dilution  into  one  tube 
of  medium. 

Take  out,  with  a  sterile  pipette,  1  cubic 
centimeter  from  the  tube  inoculated  with 
cytlphaga^'^'^luUnTol  1 '  l^O^O  dilution  and  add  to  a  fresh  tube  of 
and  Clayton.)  sterile    medium,    to    give    a    dilution   of 

1:5,000. 
If  further  dilutions  are  desired  the  last  step  is  repeated. 
The  tubes  are  incubated  at  25  to  30°C.  and  examined  daily. 
Presence  of  cellulose-decomposing  bacteria  will  be  shown  by  the 
decomposition  of  the  paper  just  at  the  surface  of  the  liquid. 
Examine  bacteria  by  Nigrosin  method. 

Exercise  56 
Themophilic  Fermentation  of  Cellulose 

Prepare  four  long  tubes  (about  25  centimeters  each)  with 
20  cubic  centimeters  each  of  the  Cellulose  peptone  medium 
(Medium  89). 

Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Control — not  inoculated. 

(6)  About  1  gram  of  fresh  horse  manure. 

(c)  About  1  gram  of  well-rotted  leaf  mold. 

(d)  About  1  cubic  centimeter  of  a  culture  of  Clostridium  ther- 
mocellum. 

1  DuBos,  R.  J.,  J.  BacL,  15 :  223,  1928. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       135 

Cover  the  tubes  with  tinfoil  and  incubate  at  60  to  65°C. 

As  soon  as  the  cultures  show  active  fermentation  make  1  cubic 
centimeter  transfers  to  tubes  of  fresh  media.  This  enrichment 
process  may  be  repeated  several  times. 

Examine  young  and  old  cultures  under  the  microscope. 

Exercise  57 

Isolation  of  Cellulose  Decomposin-g  Bacteria 

Select  samples  of  soil  from  plots  which  have  received  applica- 
tions of  straw  or  materials  rich  in  cellulose.  From  these  samples 
prepare  dilutions  of  about  1 :  10,000  and  1 :  100,000.  Instead 
of  soil,  enrichment  cultures  may  be  used  (see  Ex.  54,  55).     If 


Fig.  18. — Bacillus  cellulosae  dissolvens  attacking  filter  paper.      (Khouvine.) 

enrichment  cultures  are  used  the  dilutions  should  be  greater  than 
those  from  soil. 

Pour  plates  of  the  dilutions  from  soil  or  enrichment  cultures 
with  the  cellulose  agar  medium  (Medium  88). 

Because  of  the  long  period  of  incubation,  2  to  4  weeks,  it  is 
desirable  to  keep  the  plates  in  a  moist  chamber,  under  bell  jar 
at  28°C.  At  regular  intervals,  5,  10,  20,  and  30  days,  examine 
the  plates.  Note  change  in  color  and  clear  zones  throughout 
the  opaque  agar. 

Make  microscopic  mounts — nigrosin  and  carbol  fuchsin. 


136 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


Silica  gel  containing  macerated  cellulose  on  surface  may  also 
be   used   for   the   isolation   of   cellulose-decomposing   bacteria. 


Exercise  58 

The  Evolution  of  Carbon  Dioxide  from  Soil 

Weigh  out  100  grams  of  well  mixed  soil  into  500-cubic  centi- 
meter Erlenmeyer  flasks  or  other  suitable  vessels.  Arrange  as 
follows : 

1.  Control,  soil  alone.     No  treatment. 

2.  Soil  plus  1  per  cent  of  glucose,  starch,  cellulose,  alfalfa  meal, 
blood  meal  or  similar  substances  in  the  powdered  form. 

Bring  the  moisture  content  of  the  soil  to  two-thirds  saturation. 


Fig.  19. — Apparatus  for  measuring  carbon  dioxide  evolution  from  soil. 

After  the  test  substance  is  well  mixed  with  the  soil  set  up  the 
apparatus  in  such  a  way  that  the  CO2  evolved  will  be  absorbed 
in  25  cubic  centimeters  of  0.2  N  Ba(0H)2  solution  in  a  large  test 
tube.  The  large  tower  A  of  Fig.  19  is  filled  with  soda-lime  and 
connected  to  B  with  a  glass  tube.  The  end  of  this  tube  carries  a 
gas  washing  tube.  B  is  filled  about  two-thirds  full  of  water  and 
connected  to  C.  In  this  way  moist  CO2  free  air  is  carried  to  C, 
In  flask  C  is  the  soil  sample.  £'  is  a  test  tube  containing  the 
Ba(0H)2  solution.  The  gas  is  dispersed  into  fine  bubbles  by 
means  of  a  Rose  end  tube.  D  is  a  trap  to  catch  the  alkali  solu- 
tion in  E  if  there  is  any  back  pressure,  and  the  alkali  in  E  sucks 
back.  As  soon  as  possible,  after  the  soil  is  mixed  with  the 
various  substances,   begin  a  slow  aeration  at  the  rate  of  one 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL       137 

bubble  per  second.  Every  24  hours,  titrate  the  Ba(0H)2  solu- 
tion to  the  phenolphthalein  end-point  with  0.1  iV  oxalic  acid 
(6.3  grams  per  liter).  Continue  the  absorption  from  day  to 
day  until  the  CO 2  evolution  declines  to  nearly  a  constant  amount. 
Barium  hydroxide  reacts  with  CO2  according  to  the  following 
equation : 

Ba(0H)2  +  CO2  =  BaCOs  +  H2O.  O.IA^  Ba(0H)2  =  O.IN 
CO2  =  2.2  milligrams. 

The  excess  Ba(0H)2  is  titrated  with  oxalic  acid.  The  acid 
neutralizes  only  the  Ba(0H)2.  Ba(0H)2  +  (C00H)2  =  Ba- 
(C00)2  +  2H2O. 

The  BaCO.s  remains  unchanged.  The  difference  between  the 
excess  of  Ba(0H)2,  as  determined  by  oxalic  acid  titration,  and 
the  Ba(0H)2  taken  at  the  beginning,  will  give  the  amount  of 
Ba(0H)2  acted  upon  by  the  CO2. 

An  example  of  the  calculation  follows : 

Ba(0H)2,  O.IA^,  factor  1.06 50  cubic  centimeters 

Oxalic  acid,  O.IA^ 12.6  cubic  centimeters 

50  X  1.06 53.0  cubic  centimeters  O.liV 

Back  titration  (oxalic) 12.6 

CO2  evolved 40.4  cubic  centimeters  O.liV 

Since     1     cubic    centimeter    O.IA^ 

Ba(0H)2  takes  up 0.0022  gram  CO2 

40.4  X  .0022 0.0889   gram   CO2    per   100 

grams  of  soil. 

When  the  CO2  evolution  has  declined  to  nearly  a  constant 
amount,  plot  a  curve  showing  the  rate  of  evolution  of  the  gas. 
Plot  milligrams  of  CO2  as  ordinates,  and  days  as  abscissae. 

LITERATURE 

The  following  list  includes  some  of  tEe  more  important  books  that  treat  of 
bacteriology : 
A.  General  Bacteriology: 

Benecke,  W.  :  "  Bau  und  Leben  der  Bakterien,"  2d  Ed.,  Leipzig,  1924. 
Buchanan,  E.  D.  and  R.  E.  Buchanan:  "Bacteriology  for  Students  in 
General  and  Household  Science,"  rev.  Ed.  560  pp.,  360  figs.,  New  York, 
1926. 
Buchanan,  R.  E.,  and  Fulmer,  E.  I.:  "  Physiology  and  Biochemistry  of 
Bacteria,"  516  pp.,  Baltimore,  1928. 


138  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

Conn,  H.  J.  and  W.  H.  Conn:  "Bacteriology,"  3d  Ed.,  Baltimore,  1926. 

Ford,  W.  W.:  "Textbook  of  Bacteriology,"  1,069  pp.,  Philadelphia,  1927. 

Greaves,  J.  E.:  "Elementary  Bacteriology,"  506  pp.,  129  ills.  Phila- 
delphia, 1928. 

Jordan,  E.  O.:  "General  Bacteriology,"  9th  Ed.,  778  pp.,  191  ills.,  Phila- 
delphia, 1928. 

Jordan,  E.  O.  and  I.  S.  Falk:  "The  Newer  Knowledge  of  Bacteriology 
and  Immunology,"  1,196  pp.,  Chicago,  1928. 

Kelser,  R.  a.:  "Manual  of  Veterinary  Bacteriology,"  525  pp.,  Baltimore, 
1927. 

Kendall,  A.  I.:  "Bacteriology,  General,  Pathological  and  Intestinal," 
2d  Ed.,  680  pp.,  Philadelphia,  1921. 

Kruse,  W.:  "Allgemeine  Mikrobiologie,"  1184  pp.,  Leipzig,  1910. 

LiESKE,  R. :  "Allgemeine  Bakterienkunde,"  338  pp.,  118  figs.,  Berlin,  1926. 

Park,  W.  H.,  A.  W.  Williams,  and  C.  Krumwiede:  "Pathogenic  Micro- 
organisms," 8th  Ed.,  811  pp.,  211  figs.,  9  plates,  Philadelphia,  1924. 

RippEL,  A.:  "Vorlesungen  iiber  Theoretische  Mikrobiologie,"  171  pp., 
Berlin,  1927. 

Zinsser,  H.  and  S.  S.  Tyzzer:  "A  Textbook  of  Bacteriology,"  1,193  pp. 
6th  Ed.,  New  York,  1927. 

B.  Agricultural  Bacteriology: 

FuHRMANN,  F. :  "Einfiihrung  in  die  Grundlagen  der  technischen  Myko- 
logie,"  2d  Ed.,  554  pp.,  Jena,  1926. 

Greaves,  J.  E.:  "Agricultural  Bacteriology,"  Philadelphia,  437  pp.  1922. 

Greaves,  J.  E.  and  E.  O.  Greaves:  "Bacteria  in  Relation  to  Soil  Fertil- 
ity," 239  pp.,  New  York,  1925. 

Kayser,  E.:  "  Microbiologie  Agricole,"  4th  Ed.,  1921. 

LoHNis,  F.  and  E.  B.  Fred:  "Agricultural  Bacteriology,"  283  pp.,  66  figs.. 
New  York,  1923. 

Marshall,  C.  E.:  "Microbiology,"  3d  Ed.  1,043  pp.,  200  ills.,  Phila- 
delphia, 1922. 

Russell,  E.  J.,  et  al.  "The  Microorganisms  of  the  Soil,"  188pp.,  23  figs., 
London,  1923. 

Russell,  H.  L.  and  E.  G.  Hastings:  "Agricultural  Bacteriology,"  368 
pp.,  63  figs..  New  York,  1921. 

Waksman,  S.  a.:  "Principles  of  Soil  Microbiology,"  897  pp.,  77  figs.,  19 
plates,  Baltimore,  1927. 

C.  Reference  Books  in  Bacteriology: 

Henneberg,  W.  :  "Handbuch  der  Garungsbakteriologie,"  Bd.  1  and  2, 

Berlin,  1926. 
de  Rossi,   G.:   "  Microbiologia   Agraria  e   Tecnica,"   1410  pp.,   Torino, 

1921-1927. 
Lafar,  F.:  "Handbuch  der  technischen  Mykologie,"  Bd.  3,  503  pp.,  10 

plates,  90  figs.,  Jena,  1904-1907. 
LoHNis,  F. :  "Handbuch  der  landwirtschaftlichen  Bakteriologie,"  Berlin, 

907  pp.,  1910. 
Smith,  E.  F.:  "Bacteria  in  Relation  to  Plant  Diseases,"  Vols.  1,  1905;  2, 

1911;  3,  1914,  Washington. 


THE  STUDY  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  THE  SOIL      139 

Stoklasa,  J.  and  E.  G.  Doerell:  "Handbuch  der  biophysikalischen  und 
biochemischen  Durchforschung  des  Bodens,"  812  pp.,  Berlin,  1926. 

D.  Manuals  of  Bacteriologic  Technic: 

Abel,  R.:  ''Bakteriologisches  Taschenbuch,"  1927. 

American  Public  Health  Association:  "Standard  Methods  for  the  Exam- 
ination of  Water  and  Sewage,"  6th  Ed.,  New  York,  1925. 

Conn,  H.  J.:  *'An  Elementary  Laboratory  Guide  in  General  Bacteri- 
ology," 98  pp.,  27  figs.,  Baltimore,  1927. 

Cunningham,  A.:  "Practical  Bacteriology,"  188  pp.,  London,  1924. 

Giltner,  Ward:  "Laboratory  Manual  in  General  Microbiology,"  3d  Ed., 
472  pp..  New  York,  1926. 

Hastings,  E.  G.  and  W.  H.  Wright:  "A  Laboratory  Manual  of  General 
Agricultural  Bacteriology,"  83  pp.,  28  figs.,  Madison,  1927. 

Levine,  M. :  "Laboratory  Technique  in  Bacteriology,"  149  pp.,  New  York, 
1927. 

Norton,  J.  F.  and  I.  S.  Falk:  "Laboratory  Outlines  in  Bacteriology  and 
Immunology,"  114  pp.,  Chicago,  1926. 

Koch,  A.:  " Mikrobiologisches  Praktikum,"  109  pp.,  4  figs.,  Berlin,  1922. 

KusTER,  E.:  "Kultur  der  Mikroorganismen,"  3d  Ed.,  Leipzig,  1921. 

Lohnis,  F.:  "Landwirtschaftlich-bakteriologisches  Praktikum,"  3d  Ed., 
BerHn,  1926. 

MuiR,  R.  and  J.  Ritchie:  "Manual  of  Bacteriology,"  7th  Ed.;  753  pp., 
London,  1921. 

E.  Classification  of  Bacteria: 

Bergey,  D.  H.:  "Manual  of  Determinative  Bacteriology,"  2nd  Ed., 
Baltimore,  442  pp.,  1925. 

Buchanan,  R.  E.:  "General  Systematic  Bacteriology,"  597  pp.,  Balti- 
more, 1925. 

Lehmann,  K.  B.  and  R.  O.  Neumann:  " Bakteriologie,.  insbesondere 
bakteriologische  Diagnostik.,"  I  Band,  "Technik,  Allgemeine  Diagnos- 
tik,  Atlas,"  172  pp.,  65  plates.  Mfmchen,  1926;  II  Band:  "Allgemeine 
und  spezielle  Bakteriologie,"  876  pp.,  43  figs.,  Miinchen,  1927. 

LIST  OF  LABORATORIES 
WHERE  CULTURES  MAY  BE  SECURED 

1.  American  Type  Culture  Collection, 
George  H.  Weaver,  Curator, 

637  South  Wood  Street, 
Chicago,  Illinois. 

2.  The  Lister  Institute  of  Preventive  Medicine, 
National  Collection  of  Type  Cultures, 
Chelsea  Gardens,  London,  S.  W.,  England. 

3.  Professor  Dr.  E.  Pribram's  mikrobiologische  Sammlung, 
vorm.  Krai's  bakteriolog.  Museum, 

Wien,  IX/2.  Michelbeuerngasse  la, 
(Wien)  Vienna,  Austria. 


140  LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 

4.  Centraalbureau  voor  Schimmelcultures, 
Professor  J.  Westerdijk, 

Baarn,  Holland. 

5.  Professor  Alfred  Jorgensen, 
Laboratory  of  Fermentology, 
Copenhagen,  Denmark. 

6.  Professor  Dr.  E.  de  Herics-Toth, 

Roy.  Hungarian  Institut  of  Fermentology, 
Budapest  II.  Debroi  u.  15.  Hungary. 

7.  L' Institut  Pasteur, 
Director,  Dr.  E.  Roux, 
Institut  de  Microbiologie, 
25  Rue  Dutot, 

Paris  15.  France. 


INDEX 


Acid,  resistant  finish  for  tables,  91 

sucrose  agar,  13 
Actinomyces,  media  for,  18 
Aeration  method  for  ammonia  deter- 
mination, 63 
Agar,  chemical  composition,  5 

general  properties,  5 

washed,  5 
Albuminate  agar,  9 
Algse,  culture  media  for,  20 

in  soil,  93 

number  in  soil,  97 
AUzarine,  52 
Amino  acids,  decomposition  of,  138 

nitrogen,  69 
Ammonia,  determination  in  soil,  127 
quantitative,  62 

production,  127 

test  for,  56 
Anaerobic  bacteria,  11,  43 

culture  media,  11 

number  in  soil,  100 

cellulose  fermentation,  133 
culture  methods,  46 

nitrogen  fixation,  118 
Analysis  of  plant  material,  complete, 

76 
Apparatus  for  one  student,  89 
Artificial  cultures,  110 
Ashby's  medium,  20 
Asparagin,  mannitol  agar,  11 

sodium  lactate  gelatin,  27 

starch  agar,  14 
Autotrophic  bacteria,  2 
Azotobacter  colonies,  115 

growth  on  different  carbohydrates, 
117 


Azotobacter  colonies,  in  soil,  114 
isolation  of,  114 
nitrogen  fixation  by,  116 


B 


Bacillus  celluloses  dissolvens,  135 

cereus,  128 
Bacteria  in  soil,  92 

number  in  soil,  plate  method,  99 
Bacterium  fluorescens,  128 

hartlebii,  122 

pyocyaneum,  122 

radiobacter,  116 
Bacteroid  formation,  34 
Barium  hydroxide  solution  standard, 

56 
Barlow  stain,  51,  109 
Bean  extract,  34 
Beef  extract  agar,  8 
Beef  extract  gelatin,  8 
Black  finish  for  tables,  91 
Bouillon,  8 

Brain,  sheep  or  beef,  43 
Bristol's  medium  for  algae,  21 
Brom  cresol  purple  milk,  39 
Brucine  reagent,  59 
Bryan's  medium,  45 
Burri's  PeUkan  Tusche,  49 


Caffein  bean  extract,  34 

Calcium  hypochlorite,  seed  sterihza- 

tion,  83 
Capsule  stain,  49 
Carbohydrates,     determination    of, 

69-76 
Carbohydrates,    effect   on  nitrogen 

fixation,  120 


141 


142 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


Carbol  fuchsin,  47 

thionin  (Nicolle's),  48 
Carbon   dioxide,    determination   of, 
79,  80 
from  soil,  136 
total,  80 
Carrot  extract  agar,  33 

agar  for  yeast,  18 
Casein  hydrolysis,  42 
Caseinate  agar,  9 
Cellulose  agar,  37 

bacteria,  media  for,  35 
determination  of,  69 
decomposing  bacteria, 
isolation  of,  135 
thermophilic,  134 
decomposition 
aerobic,  134 
Characteristics  of  root  nodule  bac- 
teria, 108 
of  soil  population,  92 
Chemosynthetic  bacteria,  2 
Cleaning  solution,  90 
Clostridium  pasteurianu7n,  101,  114, 

118 
Clostridium  thermocellum,  134 
Clover  sucrose  agar,  15 
Cochineal,  52 

Color  change  of  indicators,  53 
Congo   red,   method  for  examining 
bacteria,  96 
negative  stain,  51 
Corn  meal  medium,  43 
Crone's  medium,  45 
Crystal  violet,  ammonium  oxalate, 

48 
Culture  media,  1 
Czapek's  solution,  13 

D 

Davisson-Parsons  method  for  nitro- 
gen determination,  68 

Denitrification  by  pure  cultures,  121 
in  soil,  122 

Denitrifying   bacteria,   isolation   of, 
121 
media  for,  25 


Depth,  effect  on  number,  102 
Detmer's  solution  for  algae,  20 
Diphenylamine  reagent,  59 
Direct  method  of  measuring  number 

of  bacteria,  104 
Directions  for  media,  3 
Dorner  capsule  stain,  49 
spore  stain,  50 

of  nitrogen  fixing,  bacteria,  119 


Embedding  nodules.  111 
Enrichment  media,  1 
Erythrosin,  49 

method  of  staining  soil  bacteria, 
51 
Ethyl  alcohol  solution,  25 
Exercises  in  soil  microbiology,  87 


Fat  decomposition,  41 
Ferric  ammonium  citrate,  43 
Ferrous  carbonate  medium,  32 
Filtration  of  culture  media,  4 
Flemming's  stain,  112 
Frazier's  gelatin,  42 
Fungi,  culture  media,  12 
in  soil,  93,  98 


Gelatin,  chemical  composition,  5 

general  properties,  5 

liquefaction,  42 
Gelidium  corneum,  5 
Giltay's  medium,  25 
Glucose  phosphate,  nitrogen-free,  1 1 
Glycerol  agar,  129 
Gram  stain,  48 

Green  plants,  culture  media,  44 
Gum  formation,  35 


H 


Hanging-drop  preparations,  95 

Hansen's  solution,  16 

Hay  infusion  for  protozoa,  19 


INDEX 


143 


Hayduck's  medium,  18 
Heidenhains  hsematoxylin,  112 
Heterotrophic  bacteria,  2 
Heyden  agar,  9 
Humus,  determination  of,  78 
Hydrogen  bacteria,  medium  for,  30 
sulphide  bacteria,  139 
Bavendamm,  30 
Hydroxylamine,  test  for,  58 


I 


Indicators,  53 

Indol,  test  for,  61 

Ink  method,  capsule  stain,  49 

Insects,  number  in  soil,  105 

Invertebrate  population  of  soil,  94 

Iron  bacteria,  133 

oxidizing  bacteria,  media  for,  31 
precipitating  bacteria,  132 

Isolation  of  anaerobic  bacteria,   118 


Mannitol,  nitrogen  free,  32 
phosphate  solution,  20 
soil  extract,  20 
Manure,  effect  on  number  of  micro- 

orgamisms,  103 
Media,  1 

Mercuric  chloride,  disinfectant  solu- 
tion, 90 
seed  steriUzation,  82 
Methane     bacteria,     medium     for, 

31 
Methods  of  staining,  47 
Methyl  orange,  52 

red,  67 
Methylene     blue     as     indicator    of 

anaerobiosis,  46 
Microscopic  examination  of  soil,  104, 

105 
Milk,  culture  media,  39 
brom  cresol  purple,  39 
Moisture  determination,  61 


K 


N 


Koch,  1 

Koser's  medium  for  colon-aerogenes 

group,  43 
Krainsky's  medium,  13 


Laboratories,  supplying  cultures,  139 
Laboratory  rules,  89 
Lagerberg's  spore  stain,  50 
Leguminous  plants,  bacteria  of,  106 
Lignins,  75 
Literature,  137 
Litmus,  52 
milk,  39 
Loeffler's  alkahne  methylene  blue,  47 
Lugol's  iodine,  48 


M 


Malt  extract  agar,  16 
Manganese,       oxidizing 
media  for,  31 


bacteria, 


Nahrstoff-Heyden  agar,  9 
Negative  stain,  109 
Nematodes,  number  in  soil,  103 
Nessler's  reagent,  56 
Nesslerization  of  ammonia,  62 
Nigrosin  negative  stain,  50 
Nitrate  formation,  123 

reducing  bacteria,  media  for,  25 
Nitrates  and  nitrogen  fixation,  120 

determination  of  (reduction),  65 

quantitative  determination  of,  63 

reagent,  57,  59 
Nitrification  in  Hquid  cultures,  123, 
124 

of  various  substances,  125 
Nitrifying  bacteria,  enrichment  cul- 
tures, 123 

media  for,  22 
Nitrite  formation,  123 
Nitrites,  test  for,  57 
Nitrobacter,  125 

solution  for,  23 


144 


LABORATORY  MANUAL  OF  MICROBIOLOGY 


Nitrogen,  determination  of,  65 
fixation  in  soil,  119 

fixing    capacity    of    soil 

Winogradsky's  method,  119 
fixation   by   cultures   of 

Azotobacter,  116 
bacteria,  media  for,  32 
Nodule  bacteria,  isolation  of,  106 
and    nitrogen    content  of  plants, 

113 
in  agar,  109 
Normal  sodium  hydroxide,  55 

sulphuric  acid,  54 
Nutrient  agar,  8 
broth,  8 
gelatin,  8 
Nutrition  of  bacteria,  1 
Nutrose  agar,  9 


Oxalic  acid,  standard,  55 
Oxidation  of  ammonia,  23 
sulphur,  131 


Paraffin  agar,  41 
Pasteur,  1 
Pea  extract,  34 
Pentosans,  70 
Peptone  malt  agar,  15 

mannitol  solution,  12 

sucrose,  35 
Phenoldisulphonic  acid,  60 
Phenolphthalein,  52 
Physiological  groups,  104 
Plant  material,  analysis  of,  76 
Potassium  nitrate,  thiosulphate  solu- 
tion, 26 
Potato    culture    media    or    potato 
slants,  39 

glucose  agar,  14 
Preparation  of  H  ion  indicators,  53 
Preservation  of  stock  cultures,  45 
Preserving  plates,  45 

plate  cultures,  46 
Pressure  and  temperature,  7 
Protein  decomposition,  128 


Protozoa,  94 

media  for,  19 

number  in  soil,  98 
Pyrogallic  acid  for  absorbing  oxygen, 
46 

R 

Raisin  extract,  17 
Raulin's  solution,  12 
Reaction,  3 
Reagents,  52 
Reducing  sugars,  72 
Reduction  of  sulphates,  26 
Rock  phosphate,  131 
Root,  effect  on  number  of  bacteria, 
102 
nodule  bacteria,  isolation,  107 
structure  of.  111 
Rose  bengal,  96 

S 

Safranin,  48 

Schweitzer's  reagent,  69 

Season,  effect  on  number,  102 

Sectioning  nodules.  111 

Seed  sterihzation,  82 

Selective  media,  1 

Shaffer  and  Hartman  modified,  72 

Silica  gel,  general  properties,  5 

preparation  of,  6 

Souleyre,  35 

use  of,  116 
SiUcic  acid  gel  for  nitrite  forming 

bacteria,  24 
Size  of  organisms  in  soil,  94 
Sodium  albuminate  agar,  9 

asparaginate,  glycerol  agar,  19 

caseinate  agar,  9 

citrate  (Koser),  43 
Soil  extract  agar,  10 

gelatin,  10 

stock  solution,  10 

population,  92 

samples,  how  taken,  97 
Sorenson's    phosphate    (Na2HP04.- 

2H2O),  40 
Souleyre,  silica  gel,  35 


INDEX 


145 


Spirochaeta  cytophaga,  134 
Spore-forming  bacteria,   determina- 
tion of,  101 

stain,  50 

yeast  medium,  18 
Staining  of  bacteria,  47 
Starches,  71 
Sterilization  of  media,  6 

of  soil,  7 
Straw,     effect     of    on    numbers    of 

microorganisms,  103 
Structure  of  the  root  nodule,  111 
Suction  filter,  4 
Sulphates,  reduction  of,  128 
Sulphur  bacteria,  130 
high  forms,  130 

oxidizing  bacteria,  media  for,  28 
Sulphuric  acid,  normal  solution,  54 


Transferring  cultures,  90 
Trommsdorf  reagent,  57 
Tubeuf's  medium,  15 
Truffaut  and  Bezssonoff  medium,  12 


U 


Urea  bacteria,  isolation  of,  127 
media  for,  21 
citrate  solution,  21 
decomposition,  136 
soil  extract  solution,  22 


Vegetable  tissue  for  absorbing  oxy 
gen,  46 


W 


Tap-water  gelatin,  11 
Temperature  and  pressure,  7 
Test  for  ammonia,  56 

for  ferric  iron,  133 

for  hydroxylamine,  58 

for  indol,  61 

for  nitrates,  58 

for  nitrites,  57 
ThermophiUc  bacteria,  38,  101,  134 
Thiohacillus  thioparus,  131 

thiooxidans,  132 
Thionin,  48 

Thiosulphate  solution,  28 
Thomas'  test  reagents,  57 
Thornton's  medium,  11 
Total  carbon,  determination  of,  80 

nitrogen  (Davisson-Parsons),  68 
(Kjeldahl),  65 
to  include  nitrates,  67 


Worms,  number  in  soil,  105 
Washed  agar  for  nitrifying  bacteria, 

23 
Water-holding  capacity  of  soil,  61 
Winogradsky's  direct  count,  105 

glucose-peptone  agar,  12 

medium,  11 

solution  for  Nitrosomonas,  22 


Yeasts  and  yeast  spores,  96 
infusion  (dried),  17 
infusion  (fresh),  16 
media  for,  16 
water  sulphite  agar,  27 


Ziehl's  carbol  fuchsin,  47